Pisač Euroterm6100a - 6180a - Man - en PDF
Pisač Euroterm6100a - 6180a - Man - en PDF
User Guide
HA028910/9
June 2011
Declaration of Conformity
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and
EMC specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products
comply with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.
Signed: Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited.
Kevin Shaw
(R&D Director)
IA249986U670 Issue 3 Jly 10 (CN26590)
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifi-
cations in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is
given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility
for any losses arising from errors in this document.
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
USER GUIDE
LIST OF SECTIONS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6 BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7 SCREEN BUILDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10 EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
12 ASCII PRINTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
15 THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
ANNEX A: SPECIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
ANNEX B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ANNEX C: WEB SERVER DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
EFFECTIVITY
This manual refers to recorders fitted with software version 5.1. To determine the software version fitted
to the recorder, the 'About' screen may be accessed as described in section 4.6.11.
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section Page
SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Signal wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.2 Supply voltage wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LINE SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 ACCESS FLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.1 Stylus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.2 Card slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.3 USB Front Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Flap lock operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCHIVE INACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCHIVE ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1 STATUS BAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.1 Current access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.2 Page name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.3 Alarm indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INSTRUMENT ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CHANNEL ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CHANGE BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DISK ICON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
FTP ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TRIAL MODE INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.1.4 Summary menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ACK ALL ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ALARM SUMMARY PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MESSAGE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MESSAGE TYPE FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PERIOD FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OPTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
REMOVE MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 NAVIGATION KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.1 Key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ROOT MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3 FIRST SWITCH-ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.3.1 Access to Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TEXT STRING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4 DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TREND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TIME CHANGE RECORDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.1 Vertical Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Section Page
3.4.3 Circular Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TREND MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NORMAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
NORMAL VIEW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TIMESTAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
OTHER NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.4 Vertical bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FACEPLATES AT RIGHT-HAND EDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4.5 Horizontal bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.6 Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5 OPERATOR NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1 ARCHIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.1.1 Local Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ARCHIVE ALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.1.2 Remote archiving (FTP transfer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.2 SAVE / RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2.1 Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SAVE AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.2 Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.3 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.4 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.5 Import screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.6 Export screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.7 Import User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.8 Export User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.9 Import printer driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3 CONFIG KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.3.1 Instrument configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INSTRUMENT NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
SAVE AFTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PRESET HOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PRESET MINUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.3.2 Group configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TREND UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TREND TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
TREND SPEED/TREND INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR CHART FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
START AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GRID TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
FROM POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RECORDING ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RECORDING SPEED/RECORDING INTERVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TREND HISTORY DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE/ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ALARM MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Section Page
4.3.2 Group configuration (continued)
ACK MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
POINT TYPE/SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.3.3 Channel/Alarm configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CHANNEL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
INPUT TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LIN TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
INPUT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INPUT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SHUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCALED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCALE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
BREAK RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (CJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
SPANNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PV FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ALARM NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
SETPOINT SOURCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
RATE-OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ALARM MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.3.4 Views Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HOME TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HOME GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DISPLAY ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HOME PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DISPLAY MODE ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.3.5 Archive configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FLASH SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SHORTEST TREND HISTORY / DURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA FILE FORMAT/FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ON MEDIA FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ARCHIVE TO REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
REMOTE PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PRIMARY REMOTE HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PRIMARY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
SECONDARY REMOTE HOST/LOGIN/PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
CSV FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Section Page
4.3.5 Archive configuration (Continued)
MEDIA FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CSV DATE/TIME FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.3.6 Event configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SOURCE 2 SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EVENT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.3.7 Event Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.3.8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MESSAGE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.3.9 User Linearisation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.3.10 Batch recording option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AUDITOR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY (TUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NON OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EVENT SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.3.11 Maths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
FUNCTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.3.12 Totalisers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.13 Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.3.14 Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configurable parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
SELF-START EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.3.15 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.3.16 Master comms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DETECT THIS SLAVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DETECT ALL SLAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
SHARE SOCKET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
READING DIGITAL VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.17 Output channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
MASTER COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS (RETRANSMISSION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.3.18 Demand Writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Section Page
4.3.19 E-mails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E-MAIL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
E-MAIL DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.3.20 Reports configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.3.21 Ethernet/IP™ Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
MESSAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
TABLE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CONFIGURING A PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.22 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
TRIAL MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
VIRTUAL CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SIMULATION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.4 SECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.4.1 Access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
SETTING PERMISSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ACCESS WHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CONNECT FROM REMOTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
REMOTE USER NAME/REMOTE PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
LOGIN DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
EDIT OWN PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
EDIT MATHS CONSTANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
RESET MATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PRESET TOTALISERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PRESET COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
START/RESET TIMERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SET CLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ADJUST I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ARCHIVING CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
SAVE/RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PASTE/DELETE FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
FULL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
FULL SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
BATCH CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CAN SIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CAN AUTHORIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PERFORM UPGRADES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EVENT PERMISSION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
ACTION DEMAND WRITES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ENTER BATCH DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ALLOW WEB SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.4.2 Management (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CHANGES NOT RECORDED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.4.3 Add user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW USER ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW FULL USER NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
BASED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.4.4 Remove user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.4.5 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
TROUBLE SHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.4.6 Clear Password Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Section Page
4.4.7 Active Directory server setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.5 NETWORK KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.5.1 Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
INSTRUMENT NUMBER/MAC ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
BOOTP TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SUBNET MASK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DEFAULT GATEWAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP CLIENT ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.5.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
LOCAL HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
DOMAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
PRIMARY/SECONDARY DNS SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.6 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.6.1 Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.6.2 Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LONG DATE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.6.3 Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.6.4 Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.6.5 Output Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.6 Master Comms Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.8 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
COPY RULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.6.9 Job search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
SEARCH RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.6.10 Customise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
FONT SIZE EXAMPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.6.11 About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
INSTRUMENT VARIANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CONFIG REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
LAST UPDATED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
AT VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CREATED ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
SECURITY REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SUPPORT FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4.7 JOBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.1 No Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.2 Drive relay category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.3 Totaliser category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.4 Message category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.7.5 Maths category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.7.6 Clock category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.7.7 Counter category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.7.8 Timer category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.7.9 Batch category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.7.10 Recording category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.7.11 Trend category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.7.12 Output category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.7.13 Demand Writes category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.7.14 Alarm category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.7.15 Archive category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.7.16 Email category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Section Page
4.7.17 Report category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
SEND REPORT TO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.1 FILER OPTION MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.2 THE HIDE KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.3 FILE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6 BRIDGE (REMOTE VIEWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.1.1 Minimum PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.2 CONNECTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.1 Direct PC connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.2 PC To remote recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.3 Networked systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.1 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.2 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.3 Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
CHANNEL ALARM SOUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.6 OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.1 Display Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.2 Alarm acknowledgement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.3 Status line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.4 Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON ... . . . 251
THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7 SCREEN BUILDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.1.1 Display Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.1.2 Importing/Exporting screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
IMPORTING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
EXPORTING SCREENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2 DISPLAY CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.1 Before starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.2 Screen components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.2.3 The properties page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
KEY DESCRIPTIONS (UPPER KEYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
7.2.4 Screen creation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.3.1 Basic parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.3.2 Advanced parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.1 Group Vertical/Horizontal Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.2 Group vertical bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.3 Group horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.4 Group numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.5 Channel vertical/horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.6 Channel Numeric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.7 Channel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Section Page
7.4.8 Dialogue Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.9 Navigation Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.10 Operator button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.11 Event Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.12 Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.13 Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.14 Round rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.15 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.16 Polyline- series of points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.4.17 Polygon - closed area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.4.18 Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.4.19 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.4.20 Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.5.1 XGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.5.2 QVGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.6 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.1 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.2 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.2.1 Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
DIAGNOSTIC CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
DATA ENCODING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.2.5 Text messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
LONG MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
8.3 ADDRESS MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
8.4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.4.1 Instrument data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.4.2 Channel configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.4.3 Channel Run-Time data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Section Page
8.4.4 Group data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GROUP 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.4.5 Feature identification table (FIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.4.6 Indirection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.4.7 IEEE 32-bit channel configuration data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.4.8 IEEE Area Channel run-time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.4.9 Permanent ID table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.5 DATA TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
TEXT STRINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.5.1 Function code 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.5.2 Function code 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.3 Function code 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.4 Function code 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.5 Function code 16 (Hex 10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.1 SIGNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.2 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4.1 Adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4.2 Adjustment removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10 EVENT INPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.2 SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.3 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Section Page
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2 FUSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.1 Fuse Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.2 Access to the user connections/fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.3 User wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2 WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2.1 Serial communications ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2.2 DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
12.3.1 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
LINK ERROR COUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PROTOCOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
BAUD RATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
STOP BITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PARITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINT MESSAGES FROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
MESSAGES TO PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
12.3.2 Reports configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
NUMBER OF FIELDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
FIELD N TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
STYLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
LINE FEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
12.5 REPORT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.1 Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
GROUP NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.2 Channel configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.3 Event Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
EVENT NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.5.4 Report Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.5.5 Serial Communications Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
12.6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
13.1 BASIC OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY (TRS) OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13.2.1 Internal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13.3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13.3.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
13.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Section Page
13.4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13.4.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
THERMOCOUPLE WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
13.4.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
13.5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13.6 REMOTE CJC BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH INTEGRAL CJC BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.3 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
14.2 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH REMOTE CJC BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
14.3 SMALL FRAME RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15 TUS OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.1 PRE CALIBRATION AND POST CALIBRATION ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Pre calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Post calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.2 INPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ADJUST PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
15.3 CHART MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
15.4 OTHER ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Annex A: SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Installation category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Pollution degree 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Relay output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Event input board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Analogue output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (ASCII Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Annex B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1.1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1.2 SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.3 DISPLAY TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.4 TOUCH CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.4.1 Touch screen calibrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.4.2 Touch screen verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.4.3 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.5 SYSTEM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Section Page
B1.6 DIAG SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.1 MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.2 Software version number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.3 Serial 1/Serial 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.5 Lockable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.6 Option boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.7 Input boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.8 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B1.7 QUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2.1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
B2.2.1 Battery replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
B2.3 FLAP RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
B3 OPTION ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
B4 COLOUR SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B8.1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B8.2 ERASING HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B9 MENU STRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Annex C: WEB SERVER DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C2 INTERNET LINKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3 ACCESS TABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1 INSTRUMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1.1 Instrument alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1.2 Global channel alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.2 TRENDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C3.2.1 Horizontal trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C3.2.2 Vertical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.2.3 Numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.3 MESSAGE LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.4 HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
C3.5 ABOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
SAFETY NOTES
WARNING
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of
the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault condi-
tions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Note: in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010, the recorder shall
have one of the following as a disconnecting device, fitted within easy reach of the operator, and
labelled as the disconnecting device.
a. A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947-1 and IEC947-3
b. A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool
c. A separable plug, without a locking device, to mate with a socket outlet in the building.
1. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protec-
tive conductor. The mains (supply voltage) wiring must be terminated within the connector in such
a way that, should it slip in the cable clamp, the Earth wire would be the last wire to become discon-
nected.
2. In the case of portable equipment, the protective earth terminal must remain connected (even if the
recorder is isolated from the mains supply), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous volt-
ages*.
3. The mains supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
4. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and se-
cured against accidental operation. The manufacturer’s nearest service centre should be contacted
for advice.
5. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, should be avoided
as far as possible and, if inevitable, shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the
hazard involved.
6. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/fil-
tering/sealing etc. must be installed in the recorder enclosure.
7. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impracti-
cal, shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring.
8. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the equipment might be impaired.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears under ‘Hazardous live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under
normal operating conditions, hazardous voltages are defined as being > 30V RMS (42.2V peak) or > 60V
dc.
Protective earth
USER GUIDE
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder.
The recorder comes in two versions, which differ in physical size, and in the number of I/O channels and
options available, but otherwise are identical (i.e. the operation and configuration procedures are the
same for both).
The standard recorder comes equipped for FTP transfer and is also fitted with ‘Bridge’ (Remote viewing)
software.
2 INSTALLATION
Note: It is recommended that the rear face of the panel be centre-punched at suitable positions
to locate the tips of the case clamps. Otherwise, particularly on smooth surfaces, the clamps can
‘wander’ as they are tightened, leading to inefficient clamping and possible damage to the record-
er mounting slots.
The unit is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel. With the weight of the re-
corder supported, a panel clamp is inserted into each of the mounting slots (one each on the left- and
right-hand sides). The jacking screws are then tightened sufficiently to clamp the recorder into position.
EXCESS FORCE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN TIGHTENING THESE SCREWS.
2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Standard terminal cover: 246.5 mm
Long terminal cover: 288 (closed); 415mm (open)
24.75 211.5 mm
144 mm mm
Safety Earth
137 mm
144 mm
Front view Side elevation
106.9 mm
(RHS)
102 mm
35 mm
Access Flap
Panel cutout
138mm x 138mm (+1 - 0)
or
View on underside
137 mm
5.44 x 5.44 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing
Side clamps Top/bottom clamps
x = 15 mm (0.6 inch) x = 10 mm (0.4 in)
y = 10 mm (0.4 in) y = 15 mm (0.6 inch)
Panel clamping
a˚ b˚
2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
260.90 mm
292 mm 211 mm
28.34
Safety Earth
mm
Front view
292 mm
279 mm
216 mm
Side elevation
Access Flap
Panel cutout
281mm x 281mm (+1 - 0)
or
279 mm
11.07 x 11.07 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing View on underside
Side clamps Top/bottom clamps
x = 25 mm (1 inch) x = 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
y = 12.5 mm (0.5 in) y = 25 mm (1 inch)
y
Vertical
a˚ b˚
Figure 2.2.1c shows details of universal input board wiring and figure 2.2.1d gives the pinouts for option
boards.
Input channels 7 to 12
Safety Earth
USB 1 USB 2 (M4)
USB Ports (option)
E
L N
Serial comms (option)
Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply)
RJ45 connection
Input channels 13 to 18
Input channels 7 to 12
Input channels 1 to 6
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input channels 37 to 42
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736
Input channels 25 to 30
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724
Input channels 13 to 18
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7
Input channels 1 to 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Channels Channels Channels Channels Channels Channels
1, 7, 13, 19, 25, 2, 8, 14, 20, 26, 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 5, 11, 17, 23, 29, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30,
31, 37, 43 32, 38, 44 33, 39, 45 34, 40, 46 35, 41, 47 36, 42, 48
Cold
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I junction V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Attenuator Shunt
assembly assembly
+ - + - + -
-20 to + 20 V dc
Thermocouples -200 to + 200 V dc DC milliamps
dc millivolts
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
nc Not active (2 to 30 V)
com no Vin
Relay outputs
Max number of boards = 4 for small frame or 9 for large frame
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3
no
nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
Three changeover relays
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4 Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4
c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
Four normally closed relays
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4 Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4
no
c no c no c no c no c no c no c no c no Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
Four normally open relays
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 C
Event input Number Event input Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 C
User 0V
+ - - +
V+ – I+ V+ – I+ V+ – I+ V+ – I+ Voltage Current
outputs outputs
Channel Channel Channel Channel
1 2 1 2
1 5
6 9
WARNING
DC supply voltages must never be applied to recorders fitted with isolated transmitter power sup-
plies.
Note: The minimum recommended wire size is 20AWG equivalent to 16/0.2 (0.5mm2).
LINE SUPPLY
The supply voltage to the recorder is terminated using an IEC socket which is connected to the mating
plug at the rear of the recorder. The recorder is suitable for use with all ac voltages between 85 and 265
V RMS (47 to 63 Hz), and requires 50 W max. power. For recorders without transmitter power supplies,
supply voltages between 110V dc and 370V dc are also suitable.
The low voltage supply option is terminated at a three-pin connector (plug mounted on recorder - socket
on supply cable) as shown in figure 2.2.2. The option allows the use of ac or dc supplies with the follow-
ing characteristics:
AC: 20 to 42V RMS (45 to 400 Hz)
DC: 20 to 54V (See warning above)
Power: 50 W max.
Earth
+V or ac 0V or ac
Figure 2.2.2 Low voltage supply pinout (view on fixed connector face)
Stylus storage
USBFront
Door lock (option) SD or
Compact Flash
card
a) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (small frame) b) Behind flap details (small frame)
SD or
Compact USB
Stylus Flash card Front
storage
lock
Door n)
(op t io
c) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (large frame) d) Behind flap details (large frame)
The access flap is located immediately below the recorder screen. To open the flap, insert one or more
fingers under the flap handle, and pull it outwards and down (figure 2.3). A lockable version of the flap is
available - see section 2.4 for details. Located behind the flap are (from left to right):
1. a stylus (press to eject)
2. a slot for a Compact Flash or Secure Digital (SD) card
3. a USB port (usbfront).
2.3.1 Stylus
A stylus suitable for use on the touch screen is located in a storage area to the left of the Compact Flash/
SD Card slot.
CAUTION
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be sus-
pended (section 4.1) (wait for the green section of the disk icon (section 3.1.3) to go ‘white’) before
the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility described in
section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device. For
recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
LED INDICATORS
Three LED indicators are located above the card slot as shown in figure 2.3.2c, below.
Card activity
LED (yellow)
Power/watchdog USBFront
LED (green) Power LED (yellow)
Note: It is the responsibility of the user to establish the electromagnetic susceptibility of any USB
peripheral connected to the recorder. Refer to the USB port specification in Annex A for details.
Notes:
1. Control of the flap lock is available only to users with ‘Archiving Control’ permission enabled.
2. Control of the flap lock is not possible via Bridge software.
3. The description below applies only to Archive data.
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Archive Media
OK to remove archive media
Ok
Cancel
Figure 3, below, depicts a typical trend display for a large-frame unit and gives details of the various
areas of the display page. The small frame display is similar, but the navigation keys are printed on a strip
below the chart area instead of being drawn on the screen.
Notes:
1. Dialogue boxes, message boxes etc. cause Process Variable displays to ‘freeze’ for as long as
the box is on display. Root and Option menus (amongst others) time-out (i.e. are removed from
the display) after approximately one minute. Messages, however, are displayed until the opera-
tor takes action to remove them. It should be noted, especially, that several message boxes
may be active at one time, but only the oldest one is visible, until it is removed to reveal the
‘next oldest’ message, and so on.
2. Many of the screen components can be customised as to colour/size etc. as described in sec-
tion 4.6.10 (Customise).
TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES
If the amount of space on the display page is insufficient to display the full width of the process variable
or scale value, then the displayed value is rounded down and the number of decimal places reduced. If
the width is still too restricted, the value is displayed in ‘scientific’ format, or if this is still too wide, the final
visible character of the integer part of the value is replaced by a ‘?’ (as depicted in figure 3.4.4b)
Page Name and batch status Change battery alarm Disk icon FTP activity indicator
(if option fitted) (% free space)
Channel alarm Configuration locked indicator
Instrument alarm Time and date
Current access level or
user name
Group name
Status bar Logged out No Batch in Progress 99%
11:48:04
Time/date stamp 28/05/05
28/05/05 11:47:51 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
11:45:24
28/05/05
Navigation keys
Note: ‘Trigger’ alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols.
Absolute High
Absolute Low
Absolute Absolute Deviation Rate of
Deviation in low high In / Out change
Deviation out Horizontal d R d No
indication
scales
Rate-of-change Rising Vertical No
d d
R indication
scales
Rate-of-change Falling For Deviation alarms, R = Reference; d = deviation
Faceplate symbols Scale symbols
For channel alarm symbols refer to ‘Current Trace Alarm Icons’, above.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
This indicator appears, flashing, if any of the following errors are active. The instrument alarm summary
page, described in Section 3.1.4, allows the user to view such instrument alarms as are active.
Active Directory server error The Active Directory server (section 4.5.1) cannot be accessed.
Archive failed -(message) Message explains archive failure.
Battery-backed RAM cleared This message appears if the battery has failed, and the unit has
been switched off.
Clock failure Internal clock was corrupt at power up, or the time has never been
set. Can be caused by battery failure, in which case the battery
icon will also be visible. The error is cleared by setting the time and
date. Server time forced to 00:00 1/1/1900.
Channel error Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal
CJ temperature measurement
Channel failure Indicates a hardware failure in the input channel circuit (see note).
DHCP Server failure For instruments with IP address lookup set to ‘Get from DHCP
Server’, this alarm occurs if the recorder cannot obtain an IP ad-
dress from the server. See section 4.5 for details.
FTP Archiving file lost Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
FTP Archiving too slow Remote archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches
to ‘Automatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
FTP Primary Server Failure This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the primary server as defined in Archive Con-
figuration (section 4.3.5). After the second attempt has failed, the
Secondary server is tried.
FTP Secondary Server Failure This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the secondary server as defined in Archive Con-
figuration (section 4.3.5). See also ‘FTP Primary Server Failure, above.
Insufficient non-volatile memory... There is insufficient memory available for the configuration. Can
be caused by use of Rolling Average maths functions.
Internal flash: \application\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \history\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \screens\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ is full Appears if the User partition is full. To clear, either user screens
must be simplified or files must be deleted from \User\, or both.
Maths Channel failure Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is zero.
Media Archiving file lost Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
Media Archiving too slow Archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Au-
tomatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
Network boot failure The recorder is unable to establish connection with the BootP or
DHCP server. This might be caused by, for example, cable failure,
network hardware failure, etc.
Output channel failure Indicates a hardware failure in the output channel circuit (see note).
Note: Unlike other instrument alarms, Channel Failure and Output channel failure are not self clearing.
Once the cause of failure is rectified, the recorder must be power-cycled in order to clear the alarm.
CHANGE BATTERY
This flashing indicator first appears when the battery voltage (checked every 15 minutes) indicates that
the battery is approaching the end of its useful life. The indicator continues to flash until the battery is
replaced (B2.2 in Annex B). The indicator does not appear if the battery is not fitted.
DISK ICON
This shows the free space available on whatever mass storage medium is fitted (if any), and selected for
Archive destination (note 1). The disk icon appears soon after the device is inserted (but see note 2).
During archiving, the colour of the central area of the disk changes to green (see note 3). No other disk
activity (e.g. save/restore configuration) is indicated.
Notes
1. The icon appears only when a memory device is present, AND when that memory device has
been selected in the ‘Archive to media’ selection in archive configuration (section 4.3.5). For
example: if a memory stick is inserted in ‘usbfront’, but Archive to Media is set to ‘mediacard’,
then the disk icon appears only if a suitable card is present in the ‘mediacard’ slot.
2. When a disk is inserted into a USB floppy disk drive which is connected to the recorder, the disk
icon appears only after the disk has been accessed, (either by reading from it or writing to it),
or after the file system has been opened by touching the ‘file’ key. (This note does not apply for
disks which have been inserted before the disk drive is plugged in.)
3. The central area goes green whenever local archiving is taking place - not only when archiving
is taking place to the memory device selected in Archive configuration.
FTP ICON
The FTP icon appears to the right of the disc icon position whenever transfer activity is taking place.
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Remove Media
Ok
This contains a list of the currently active instrument alarms. For a list of possible alarms and their defini-
tions, see section 3.1.3, above.
Notes:
1. Alarms are always listed in Point/Alarm order with input channels first, followed by derived
channels, totalisers and counters, if these options are fitted.
2 When the alarm source returns to its non-alarm state: Unlatched alarms are removed from
the list whether or not they have been acknowledged; latched alarms remain displayed until
acknowledged. See section 4.3.3 for a description of alarm types and actions.
3. There are no time or history components associated with the Alarm Summary. If Alarm mes-
sages have been enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2), then alarm initia-
tion/acknowledgement times and dates can be found from the trend and trend history displays,
described in section 3.4 or in Message log described later in this section.
4. If an alarm is active on a channel which is not included in any group, then although the channel
alarm symbol will flash, the alarm will not appear in any of the alarm summary pages.
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Unlock Flap
Group 6
Group 5
INDIVIDUAL ALARMS
Individual alarms are acknowledged from the alarm summary page by touching the relevant item (high-
lights yellow), then touching ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4d, above, at-
tempts to show this process.
GROUP ALARMS
Alarms can be acknowledged on a group basis by calling the alarm summary page for the relevant
group, then pressing the Options key (section 3.2), the ‘Ack Group Alarms’ key and finally, ‘Yes’ in the
resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4e below, attempts to show this process.
Batch
Note
Ack Group Alarms
Ack Group Alarms Confirm acknowledge of alarms?
Yes No
ALL ALARMS
To acknowledge all active alarms, touch (e.g.) the channel alarm icon at the top of the screen. From the
resulting ‘Summary’ menu, select ‘Ack all Alarms’, then finally, touch ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confir-
mation box.
Note: The options menu is context sensitive, and may, therefore, not appear as illustrated above.
Note: The following description shows the situation where batch ‘Scope’ is configured as ‘Group’.
The description is similar when ‘Scope’ = ‘Instrument’ except that there is only one line (Instru-
ment), instead of one line per group.
As shown in figure 3.1.4f, below, the Batch Summary page contains the following batch information:
1. Group names in group number order (if Scope = Group) or Instrument Name if scope = ‘Instrument’
2. Batch active indicator (green spot)
3. Initiation time and date
4. Elapsed time for the batch
5. Batch Field 1 and its ‘value’.
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Unlock Flap
Batch Control
Batch start Elapsed Batch Field 1 Batch Field 1
Group names time and date time text values Sort (ON)
Highlight (OFF)
Exit
Figure 3.1.4f Batch Summary page (Group mode - sort OFF; highlighting ON))
Touching anywhere on a group row calls a pop-up menu as shown above. The functions of this menu are
as follows:
FULL DETAILS
Touching this key calls the Batch Details page showing the group name, batch status and batch field
details.
BATCH CONTROL
This calls a page similar to the Full Details page, but including a ‘NEW’ key to allow the operator to start a
new batch. If the batch is configured as ‘Start/Stop’ a ‘Stop’ key is also included allowing the user to stop
the batch.
SORT
If Sort is Off (default), the groups appear in Group number order with Group 1 at the top and group 12 at
the bottom. The key legend is ‘Sort (ON)’.
If Sort is On, those groups with batches running appear (in group number order) at the top of the list, fol-
lowed by any remaining groups (also in group number order). The key legend is ‘Sort (OFF)’.
HIGHLIGHT
If Highlight is Off (default), then all groups’ text appears in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (ON)’.
If Highlight is On then the text associated with groups which have batches running appears in green.
Remaining groups’ text is in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (OFF)’.
EXIT
Closes the pop-up menu. (It closes itself after approximately 50 seconds.)
Messages are retrieved from the history files in batches of 100 messages. If there are more than 100
messages, ‘Earlier messages..’ appears after the hundredth message. Touching ‘Earlier messages..’ calls
the option menu, and touching ‘Earlier messages..’ in this menu, calls the next batch of 100, and so on. If
applicable, operating ‘Later messages..’ / ‘Later messages..’ calls the previously displayed 100 messages.
As can be seen from figure 3.1.4g the list of messages can be ‘filtered’ both by type and by time. For
example, setting the message type to ‘Alarm’ and the period filter to ‘Last Day’ excludes all messages
except alarm messages which have occurred within the previous 24 hours. (For clarity, the figure shows
both filters open. In fact, only one can be open at a time)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Group 6
Group 5
Group 5 09:06:22
Engineer
Batch number:050405A12 05/04/05
PERIOD FILTER
This picklist allows the user to select one of the following to define the period of time that the message
list is to encompass:
All History, Last Month (28 days), Last Week, Last 3 Days, Last Day or Last Hour.
OPTION MENU
Touching a message (highlights yellow) calls the Option Menu* as shown in figure 3.1.4h, below.
Group name 09:06:22
Engineer
Batch number:050405A12 05/04/05
* The option menu can also be called by touching the option key. In this case:
a. Enter History calls the current Trend History display, as described in section 3.4, and
b. Because no message is highlighted, the ‘Full Details’ key is not enabled,
Notes:
1 Selecting ‘Enter History’ whilst either ‘Earlier Messages’ or ‘Later Messages’ is highlighted calls
the current History page.
2 If the Option Menu has ‘timed out’ leaving a message highlighted, and the option key is oper-
ated, then this is equivalent to reselecting the message.
Touching the key results in either an ‘OK to remove archive media’, or a ‘DO NOT REMOVE Archive Me-
dia! message, as appropriate. See figure 3.1.4i
CAUTION
Removal of memory devices such as SD cards or Compact Flash cards whilst archiving is taking
place can lead to permanent, irreparable damage to the device, rendering it unusable.
Ok Cancel
Goto Group Allows a group to be selected for display. Groups which are not ‘display enabled’ in the
Config/Views page (section 4.3.4) are greyed. An alarm icon appears (as shown for groups
1 and 4, in figure 3.2.1b, below) for any group containing one or more points in alarm. The
icon flashes if any of the group’s alarms have not been acknowledged.
Notes:
1. If there is insufficient space on the display screen for all the enabled groups or views, ‘More...’
keys appear, as necessary, to allow further items to be displayed for selection.
2. In normal operating (e.g. trend) displays, the right arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in ascending group number order. The left arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in descending group number order.
Root Menu
Home Operator
Goto Group
Root Menu Group 2
Group 1
Home Operator
Group 3
File Remove Media Group 4
The Root menu/Goto View/Alarm summary key calls the Alarm summary page for the current group to
the screen. Alternatively, Alarm summary can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu,
but in this case, the user must select an alarm summary group from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu. See
section 3.1.4 for more details of the alarm summary page.
MESSAGE LOG
The Root menu/Goto View/Message log key calls the Message Log page for the current group to the
screen. Alternatively, Message Log can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu, but in
this case, the user must select a ‘Group’ for the Message Log display from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu.
Notes:
1 There is no on/off switch associated with the recorder.
2 Date, time and the message ‘Power Up’ are printed on the chart each time power is applied to
the recorder, followed by a similar message giving ‘Config Revision’ and ‘Security Revision’.
3 A red line is drawn across the width of the chart at power up
The recorder has four security levels as follows:
Logged out Initially, no access to recorder configuration is possible. Only Archive, Login/security and
the System ‘About’ functions can be accessed - via the root menu. Limited or full access
can be permitted from ‘Engineer’ level.
Operator* No access to recorder configuration is possible until access permissions have been set up.
Section 4.4.1 describes how limited or full access can be permitted by an operator with
‘Engineer’ level access.
Engineer* Accessed initially, by entering ‘100’ as the password (section 3.3.1, below). Full access to all
recorder functions is available. Section 4.4.1 describes how the Engineer level password
can be edited and an Operator password can be entered if required. The section also de-
scribes how access permission to some or all of the recorder functions can be granted, or
not, to individual user names and default security levels (except ‘Service’).
Service Full access to all recorder functions and to areas of recorder memory for diagnostic pur-
poses. For use only by Service Engineers.
*Note: For units with the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Engineer and Operator
passwords are both ‘100’.
Login 11:52:04
05/04/05
Select the required access level and enter the password if
required.
2
User Logged out Touch 'logged out'
area...
Logged out
Operator
...then touch access
Engineer level required. 11:49:24
05/04/05
Service
3
Touch the password window when it appears, and enter the password.
The Engineer level password is '100' when the unit is despatched from
the factory. Passwords can be edited in 'Security' as described in sec-
tion 4.4.1.
The screen reverts to the home page, with the new access level dis- 11:46:44
played in the 'Current access level' key 05/04/05
Close
Notes:
1. For units which have the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Operator password is
‘100’. Otherwise no password is required for default Operator level access. In either case the
Operator access level password can be edited in ‘Security’ configuration. (Section 4.4.1.)
2. The login screen, above, can also be called by operating the Root menu, then ‘Operator’ then
‘Security’, then ‘Login’. In such a case, the screen reverts to the ‘Operator’ page rather than
returning to the home page once login has been achieved.
3. Figure 3.3.1a shows ‘Login by user list’ which is the default method. If either Auditor option
and/or the Security management option is enabled, an alternative procedure is possible where
each user has to enter a name and associated password - i.e. there is no list of users/access
levels to choose from. See section 4.4.2 (Management) for details.
4. For Active Directory users, a password expiry warning message (below) pops up on log-in,
stating how many days remain before the password expires (configured at the Active Directory
server).
Warning
Fred password expires in 2 days
Ok
*Notes
1. The character on each display key is always a capital letter, whether or not the actual character
being entered is in capitals or lower case.
2. The cursor keys mimic the function of the left and right arrow Navigation keys.
3. As an alternative, text may be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port
behind the access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the
instrument (section 2.2.1).
Cursor keys
Text string
(all * for password) **
Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L ˚
Z X C V B N M \ .
Text String
Ä Å Á À a Æ Ç É È Ë
Ê Í Ì Ï Î Ó Ò Ô Ö º
Ü Ú Ù Û ÿ Ñ α β Γ δ
ε η θ µ π Σ τ φ Ω
Text String
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 – E . ,
Text String
! " £ $ % ^ & * ( )
- _ + = { } [ ] : ;
| ' 3 – ‚ ¿ ¡ ¥ ¢ 2
TREND HISTORY
Trend history, allows the user to review group history. The maximum amount that can be reviewed
depends on a number of factors, including how many points are configured, how rapidly the traces are
changing and so on. At a recording rate of 20 mm/hour (see group configuration - section 4.3.2), with
all channels configured, a minimum of 30 day’s worth of traces is available for viewing, provided that the
group contents are not re-configured during this period (in which case, the history starts at the end of the
re-configuration). The amount of trace visible on the screen depends on the recording rate, the higher
the rate, the less trace is visible at any one time.
Notes:
1. Trend history mode is available only for groups with ‘Recording Enable’ enabled (Group con-
figuration - section 4.3.2) and only for vertical, horizontal or circular trend display modes.
2. Trend history mode is vertical for vertical and circular trend modes and horizontal for horizontal
trend mode.
3. Channel cycling is inhibited in trend history mode. To increment the current channel, touch the
faceplate.
4. Group faceplates are not displayed in trend history mode.
5. Operation of the Root/Goto View/Message Log key (section 3.2.1), when in history mode, dis-
plays a message log page containing messages which occurred at or near the selected cursor
time.
6. With A/B switching selected, traces are displayed with the ‘A’ or ‘B’ span/zone, colour settings
etc. obtaining at the cursor time. See sections 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.7, for more details of A/B
switching.
To enter trend history mode, the option key can be used (as shown for vertical trend mode in figure
3.4.1b), or the trace area of the screen can be continuously touched until the screen blanks prior to re-
drawing. A ‘Preparing History, please wait’ message appears whilst the re-drawing calculation is taking
place. Although tracing stops whilst trace history mode is active, no data is lost. Process Variable values
are saved in the recorder memory. Alarms are still scanned-for and any associated action taken.
The trend history display is similar to the real-time trend display, but with a dark background and with the
addition of a slider control and arrow keys for selecting that part of trend history which is to be displayed.
The controls are used as follows:
1 Touching an arrow key key causes the trace history to move an incremental amount.
2 Holding an arrow key continuously, causes continuous movement.
3 Touching and dragging the slider, whilst observing the time/date display, allows the user to select
the section of history exactly. Touching the slider bar either side of the slider causes a page shift in
the relevant direction. The Page up and Page down keys also provide this function.
On first entry to trend history mode, the channel value and the time and date shown in the faceplate
are those at the top edge of the chart. Touching the screen causes a cursor to appear at point of screen
contact. This cursor can be ‘touched and dragged’ to provide a reference point on the current trace.
The displayed value date and time refer to the cursor intersection with the current channel. To return to
real-time trending, the Option key is operated, followed by ‘Exit History’.
Note: Changes from standard time to daylight saving time and back again are not ‘green lined’ in
this way
Option Menu
Option Batch
Key
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Enter History
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Enter History
Cursor to move
minimum
amount
05/04/05 18:28:22 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
14:46:44
05/04/05
Exit History
Message Log
One of the channels is defined as being the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel and this is identified on the chart
by its pen icon being diamond shaped rather than triangular as for non-current channels. If a channel
is included in the display group, but its status is ‘not good’ for some reason, then its pen icon is hollow.
Each channel in the display group becomes the ‘current’ channel, in turn, for approximately 10 seconds
– i.e. the channels are cycled-through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final chan-
nel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds, the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the
sequence repeats. This scrolling process can be stopped using the Channel Cycling key in the Option
menu.
There are two faceplates associated with this display mode, one above the ‘chart’, showing the current
channel’s descriptor and its digital value; the other - to the right of the ‘chart’ - showing a bargraph rep-
resentation of the current channel’s value, together with a scale showing the low and high range values
for the channel. Touching either of these faceplates causes the current channel number to increment.
To select a particular channel to be the current channel, the relevant pen icon can be touched. In either
case, the bargraph and the background colour of the channel descriptor take the colour of the new cur-
rent channel.
Touching the trace for a few seconds, or using the Option key then ‘Enter History’ calls the Horizontal
trend history page. See section 3.4, above for more details.
Time and date are printed on the ‘chart’ immediately to the right of grid lines, and it is to these grid lines
that the printed time and date relate.
Note: At power-up, only those messages which occurred within the ‘time width’ of the page are
displayed
View Messages
06/04/05 12:02:20 Batch Number 050406-3
06/04/05 11:11:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 11:11:34 Batch start (Engineer)
06/04/05 11:09:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:09:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 10:57:34 Batch Number 050406-2
06/04/05 10:55:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 10:55:34 Batch start (Engineer))
Ok
14:11:00 14:13:40 14:16:20
06/04/05 06/04/05 06/04/05
400
06/04/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
The circular trend mode, if enabled, can be called by using the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of
the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
For large frame recorders, two alternative views called ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Normal View’ are available and
are toggled between by means of a push-button key near the top left corner of the screen. In each case,
faceplates can be displayed, or not, as required, using the Option key ‘Faceplates On/Off’ selection. The
diameter of the chart is independent of faceplate on/off selection. When quitting History, Normal view
is always returned to. Small frame recorders use only ‘full screen’ view, (except when viewed via Bridge
software when the small frame recorder behaves in the same way as the large frame recorder).
TREND MODES
The way in which traces are laid down on the chart depends on the action to be taken when the chart is
‘full’, as set up in group configuration - section 4.3.2. The user can select ‘Rotate’ or ‘New Chart’.
ROTATE
In the following description, the word ‘segment’ is used interchangeably with ‘Major chart division’. The
number of Major chart divisions is a function of the selected chart speed, as described in Group Configu-
ration (section 4.3.2).
With ‘Rotate’ selected, the traces start one major chart division anti-clockwise from the top of the chart
and trace clockwise until they reach the top of the chart (‘12 o’clock’). At this point, the chart, complete
with time stamps and traces, rotates one major chart division anticlockwise, and the tracing process con-
tinues. When the chart is ‘full’, the oldest segment-full of tracing is removed, leaving an empty segment
to be traced-on when the chart rotates.
Figures 3.4.3b and 3.4.3c, below show Circular trending in ‘Rotate’ mode.
NEW CHART
With ‘New Chart’ selected, tracing starts at top of the chart (12 o’clock) and continue to trace clockwise
round the chart, back up to the vertical. When the chart is full, it is cleared, new timestamps are dis-
played, and tracing restarts from the top of the chart.
The start time of the tracing can be set as a part (‘Start at’) of group configuration, the choices available
depending on the time per revolution setting. The start time is placed at top centre of the chart, and
‘backfilled’, clockwise, round to the current time.
Note: The use of ‘12 o’clock’ above is intended to be illustrative and only to explain angles in
terms of a normal analogue clock face. It does not mean that this position must actually be noon
or midnight in real time.
06/04/05 10:00
10:55 10:05
10:50 10:10
10:45 10:15
10:40 10:20
10:35 10:25
10:30
NORMAL VIEW
Normal view is available only for large frame recorders (also small frame recorders when viewed via
Bridge software). As shown in figure 3.4.3b, below, this provides a view of the chart, together with scale,
chart speed, message bar and navigation keys. The figure shows a view with faceplates selected on.
1113.9806˚C
Furnace 1 Te..
1200.9456˚C
Flow 2
06/04/05 10:50 06/04/05 10:30
1299.65l/hr
Normal View
06/04/05 10:10 1 hr/rev
06/04/05 10:40
Figure 3.4.3c Circular Trend full screen view (with faceplates selected off)
In ‘New Chart’ mode (unless the chart ‘bridges’ midnight), the date appears only at top centre of the
chart. All other chart divisions are identified by time only.
OTHER NOTES
1. Adaptive recording results in two traces per trend, as in other trend display modes.
2. For successful circular trend display, ‘Circular Settings’ must be enabled for the relevant group (sec-
tion 4.3.2), and ‘Circular Trend’ must be enabled for the group, in Views configuration (section 4.3.4).
If Circular Trend is enabled, but Circular Settings is disabled, then, although the circular chart will
appear, it is unlikely that it will contain any trends.
3. The circular chart speed is unaffected by A/B switching of Trend Speed/Interval (section 4.3.2).
4. Circular trends backfill only to the previous power up.
Note: The description above refers to the 180 mm version of the recorder. For the 100 mm ver-
sion, the faceplates appear above the bars for one or two points, but to the right of the bars for
three or more points.
Operation of the option key calls the Option menu display for this display page, allowing faceplates to be
selected on or off. This feature is available for vertical trend, circular trend and vertical bargraph displays
only.
To call the horizontal bargraph display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the ena-
bled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
As the number of channels in the display group increases, the bars and their faceplates get narrower,
As the number of PVs increases, the bars get narrower. As the bars get narrower, so the scale values
become truncated as shown in figure 3.4.4b. The bars have a set minimum width, and if the total number
of points in the group cannot be displayed within the width of the screen, a horizontal scroll bar appears,
allowing ‘hidden’ bars to be viewed. Similarly, the faceplates reduce in height to a minimum readable
height. If there are more point faceplates than can be accommodated within the height of the screen, a
vertical scroll bar appears, allowing hidden faceplates to be displayed as required.
Notes:
1. For large frame recorders, single column format is used when there are up to 12 channels in the
display group; double column for more than 12 channels. For small frame recorders, only the
single column mode is employed, with a scroll bar when necessary.
2. For large frame recorders, up to 26 points can be displayed simultaneously; for small frame
recorders the maximum is 5 points. In either case, if more points are enabled than can be
displayed within the height of the screen, a vertical scroll bar appears allowing currently hidden
channels to be accessed.
Trend history mode is not available from this display mode.
To call numeric display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the enabled display
modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
400.00 800.00
Channel 2 487.39˚C
400.00 800.00
Channel 3 235.68˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 4 378.99˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 5 0.49V
0.00 1.00
0 500 0 500
0 100 0 100
3.4.6 Numeric
Entered from Horizontal bargraph mode by means of the down arrow key, or selected using the Root
Menu ‘Goto View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as digital values. The
format (which is automatically selected) is based on the number of channels in the display group. Figures
3.4.6a, 3.4.6b and 3.4.6c, show typical (large frame) examples of the one, two and three column versions
of this display mode respectively. Within each version, the process variable display areas expand or con-
tract to fill the screen.
A further operation of the down arrow key returns to Vertical Trend Display mode described in section
3.4.1 above, or if user screens are fitted and enabled, to the first user screen (section 7). Alternatively, any
one of the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Logged out Group name 11:54:50
06/04/05
Channel 1
700.87
Channel 2
487.39
Channel 3
235.68
Channel 4
378.99
Channel 5
0.49
Figure 3.4.6a Numeric display mode (1 to 5 channels example)
Note: Figures 3.4.6a, b and c apply to the large frame instrument. For the small frame instrument,
the single column display (figure 3.4.6a) is used for groups with up to four points enabled, and the
two column display (figure 3.4.6b) is used, with scroll bar if necessary, for groups with more than
four points. The small frame recorder does not employ a three-column mode (figure 3.4.6c).
700.87 487.39
Channel 3 Channel 4
235.68 378.99
Channel 5 Channel 6
0.49 0.85 V
64 %
The note appears on the chart and in the Message Log, preceded by the date, time and current full user
name, as shown in the first example below. If ‘Audit Trail’ is enabled, the note contains audit trail informa-
tion, as shown in the second example below. See section 4.4.2 for details of the Auditor options.
06/04/06 13:51:11 Frederick Bloggs, New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A, Tube 1.
To enter a message:
1. Press the Option key, then the ‘Note’ key
2. If necessary enter Signature and Authorization passwords (Auditor 21CFR11 option only - see section
4.4.2).
3. Touch the note area of the resulting pop-up display (see note below).
4. Enter the required text of up to 120 characters (spaces are also counted as characters). Press Ok
when finished.
5. View the note and
a. press the Ok button to enter the note OR
b. re-touch the text area to edit the note OR
c. press the Cancel key to quit note entry.
Option Menu
Batch
Option
Key
Note Note
Faceplates On/Off
Operator Note
Channel Cycling Off
Operator Notes list.
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Appears if note area is touched contin-
Enter
uously for History(approx).
2 seconds AM Shift started
List entries are made in Instrument
AM Shift finished
Configuration (section 4.3.1)
PM Shift started
PM Shift finished
Note: Touching the note area continuously for two seconds or more, causes a list of pre-defined
messages to appear. Touching one of these messages selects it as the operator note, which can
then be edited in the normal way (if required) before the OK key is operated. There are a maxi-
mum of 13 pre-defined messages, 12 of which are user editable in the Configuration/instrument
menu (section 4.3.1), the 13th being the non-editable MAC address of the recorder.
4.1 ARCHIVE
Notes:
1. The archiving functions described below can also be initiated by job action - see section 4.7.15.
2. Archiving is carried out on a group by group basis, with a message being sent to each group
when its archive is finished. When all the groups have been archived, a pop-up appears to
inform the user that archiving is complete. Because of the sequential nature of this process, the
time given in this pop-up is different from the times which appear in the messages generated
for the individual groups.
3. For floppy disk drives (connected via a USB port), it is not recommended that archiving be ena-
bled for more than one group (see ‘Group’ configuration - section 4.3.2)
CAUTION
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be sus-
pended before the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility
described in section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory
device. For recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
Archive All
Suspend Archiving
Cancel Archive
Local archive allows the user to initiate data transfer to the device defined in the ‘Media’ picklist for all
groups with ‘Archive to Media’ enabled (Group configuration - section 4.3.2). Archiving is initiated by
touching the relevant archive period key (e.g. Last Day’). The memory device can be selected as ‘medi-
acard’ (the integral Compact Flash or SD card), or a USB port can be selected if, for example, a memory
stick is to be the destination device. USBfront is located behind the flap below the screen. If the option
is fitted, USB 1 and USB 2 ports are located at the recorder rear panel.
Archiving starts as soon as the selection is made, and cannot be stopped until completed, unless the
Cancel Archive key is operated, in which case the archive will be stopped after a confirmatory message
has been responded to. The Cancel key is active only if ‘Archiving Control’ is enabled in Security/Access
(section 4.4) for the current login.
ARCHIVE ALL
This causes the recorder to archive all its history files.
If the memory device becomes full before archiving is complete, archiving pauses and a pop-up request
appears, asking for a replacement. If this request is not responded to within 10 minutes of its appear-
ance, archiving is aborted.
Unattended archiving can be paused by the user (e.g. to change media without losing data) by operating
the ‘Suspend Archiving’ / ‘Resume Archiving’ button. Any archiving in progress is allowed to complete
before the ‘Suspend Archiving’ request takes effect. Transfer activity is indicated in the ‘Archive transfer’
window.
Below the selection buttons are a number of status windows relating to the selected memory device.
‘Media Full’ is an estimate, based on the current configuration, of when the memory device will become
full. The meanings of the ‘Media Size’ and ‘Free Space’ values are self evident.
If automatic archiving is active (section 4.3.5), then automatic and manual archives will operate on a first
come-first served basis. Some files will be saved twice in such a circumstance, the later archive’s files
overwriting any earlier archive’s files which have the same name.
Before removing the memory device, archiving should be suspended again, using the ‘Suspend Archive’
key. This ensures that the memory device can be safely removed.
In order to carry out a successful transfer, details of the remote host must be entered in the Archive sec-
tion of the ‘Config’ menu (section 4.3.5).
Section 4.1.1
Archive Last Hour
Archive All
Cancel Archive
Additionally, a user on a remote PC has full viewing capabilities, can extract recorder files at any time, and
can access those items of recorder configuration that are associated with the user’s login. For successful
connection, ‘Connect from Remote’ must be enabled and the ‘Remote user name’ and ‘Remote pass-
word’ must be defined in one of the accounts (all in the Security access menu (section 4.4.1)).
Notes:
1. In order to view history files when accessing the instrument remotely, the recorder’s address,
the ‘Remote user name’ and the ‘Remote password’ must be supplied to an FTP client such as
PC Review or Microsoft® Internet Explorer.
2. When accessing files using Microsoft® Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can be in one
of two forms:
a ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows the user to log in as the anonymous user (if the
instrument has any account with ‘Remote user name’ set to ‘Anonymous’ and a blank password).
b ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific user.
3. For IE5 users only: Microsoft® Internet Explorer displays, by default, history files only. To exit
the history folder, either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Enable
folder view for FTP sites” option, or check the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Use
Web based FTP” option.
Import Export
Where a file name is required, then, if the displayed file name is suitable, operation of the ‘Save’, ‘Re-
store’, ‘Import’ or ‘Export’ key will initiate the action. If, instead, a file name has to be entered, this is
carried out as follows:
Touching the filename window causes a pop-up menu to appear, giving a list of ‘Volumes’ in the Flash
memory or on the memory device (if inserted). Figure 4.2b shows an imaginary Volume contents list,
displayed by touching the name ‘user’, then operating the down arrow or ‘open folder’ key. (See section
5, below for more details). Once the correct folder is open, either select an existing file, or enter a new
filename, by touching the FileName window and entering the name using the pop-up keyboard(s) as de-
scribed in section 3.3.1 above. Operation of the Save/Restore key initiates the action.
\user\ Hide
4.2.1 Save
Touching this item allows the current configuration to be saved in the recorder’s memory. Files saved in
this way are not in a ‘readable’ format and are used only for archive /security purposes or for transfer to
another, similar, recorder.
SAVE AS
This selection box allows a configuration to be saved, if required, in a format suitable for importing into
previous recorder models. The default is always the current instrument.
4.2.2 Restore
Touching this item allows the user to select or type-in a previously saved configuration file name, which
will then be used as the current configuration. Touching the ‘Restore’ key completes the operation.
Check boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data, Security data (note 3), Network data and Screen
data to be chosen for the restore function.
Notes:
1 Screen data restores faceplate status for vertical trend and vertical bargraph modes, and user
screen information (if the option is fitted).
2. If archiving is in progress when a ‘Restore’ is requested, the Restore operation will be delayed
until the archive is complete (maybe several minutes). If required, the ‘Cancel Archive’ key (sec-
tion 4.1 above) can be used to speed up the Restore process, at the cost of losing the archive
data.
3. If ‘Centralised Security’ is active (part of Security/Management configuration - section 4.4.2)
‘Security Data’ is not selectable (either for ‘Restore’ or for ‘New’ (below)).
4. If the file to be restored has been created using ‘C-Edit’ software, each of the characters used
in the file name must lie within the unicode range 0 to 255, or the file name might not be dis-
played correctly.
4.2.3 New
Touching this item causes the factory entered default configuration to be loaded for use, or for editing.
Operation of the New/Default key completes the operation. Tick boxes allow one or more of Configura-
tion Data, Security data (note 3 above) and Network data to be chosen for the restore default function;
only those items which are ticked are replaced by default values.
For recorders with the User Screens option (section 7), a further tick box is displayed - ‘Screen Data’
4.2.4 Text
This is identical to the ‘Save’ function described above, but the configuration is saved in ASCII format, and
can be transferred to a computer and read, printed etc. as required. It is not possible, using this means,
to modify the configuration and then re-load it.
Touching the User Linearisation field allows the user to select which of ‘UserLin1’ to ‘UserLin4’ is to con-
tain the imported file.
Touching the File Name field, calls a popup menu similar to that shown in figure 4.2b. This allows the user
to select the table to be imported.
where ‘n’ is the total number of XY pairs in the table, and or each pair, X is the input value, and Y is the
linearised value corresponding to X. See section 4.3.9 for full details.
Note: Imported linearisation tables will not become effective until after the next configuration
‘Apply’ operation.
Note: Imported printer drivers do not become effective until after the next configuration ‘Apply’
operation.
Notes:
1. Figure 4.3b gives an overview of the configuration menus.
2. If an option is not fitted, it does not appear in the above list.
When making changes to the configuration the name of each changed parameter is displayed in red
(instead of the normal black) until the ‘Apply/Discard’ key has been operated. For example, in channel
configuration, if a thermocouple were to be changed from Type J to Type K, ‘Lin Type’ would appear in
red, until the Apply key is operated.
Should an attempt be made to leave configuration with unsaved changes, a warning message appears,
allowing the user to apply the changes, to discard the changes or to return to configuration (Cancel).
Config
Data Has Been Modified
HA028910
Instrument Modbus Address 1
(Section 4.3.1) Trend Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Instrument Modbus Security Disabled = Disabled
Trend Interval 1 s
Comms Channel Timeout 0 s
Issue 9 June 11
Groups Circular Settings
Preset Hour 0
12
Grid Type From Point
Channels Preset Minute 0
0
from Channel 3
Disable Warning Dialogs
Views Recording Enable
Show Operator Notes List
Archive Recording Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Apply Discard
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
Recording Interval 1 s
Events
Trend History Duration 25.96 Days
Remote
(Section 4.3.5) Range Units C
Scaled
Compression Normal
Offset 0 V
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5 Mb None
Scale Type
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1 Local Filter None
Duration 1 0 8 . 0 6 Days Break Response None
Compression Normal
Show Remote settings Cold Junction Type Off
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5 Mb
Archive to Remote None Descriptor TurbineTempA
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 59
User Guide
Page 60
User Guide
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
¡
¢
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
¢
¡
Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
0.125 Seconds Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
High Priority interval Counter number 1) Counter 1
Medium priority interval 1 Seconds Enable
Low priority interval 2 Seconds Value OFF Units
Counters (option)
Store diagnostics Section 4.3.13 Units Units
HA028910
Counters Preset 0 Units
Slave 1) Remote_1
Enable Timers Preset now
Issue 9 June 11
Online Connections
Descriptor Counter 1
Descriptor Remote_1 A/B Switching
Master Comms
Network Ethernet Master Comms (option) Scale Low 0 Units
IP Address 149.121.30.0 Section 4.3.16 Scale High 1 Units
Modbus address 1 Zone Low 0 %
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
Section 4.3.15
Enable Off
Retry 3 Job Number 1
Max Block Size 124 Register Category No Action
Connections (option)
Share Socket
Apply Discard
Login Required
Timers
Username Username Section 4.3.14
Password ********
ASCII Input Timer number 1) Timer 1
Apply Discard Detect All Slaves Modbus Slave
Port Serial 1 Enable
Port Serial 1 Remaining 00:00:00
Link Error Count 0
Link Error Count 0 Repeat in 00:00:00
ASCII Printer Reset Error Count
Reset Error Count Reset now These buttons appear
only after 'Apply' has
Port Serial 1 Protocol ASCII (input) been operated
Protocol Modbus Slave Start now
Online Connection EIA232
Connection EIA232
Descriptor Timer 1
Link Error Count 0 Baud Rate 19200 Baud Rate 19200
Self start
Reset Error Count Stop Bits 1
Stop Bits 1 Date Any
Parity None Month Any These fields appear
Protocol ASCII Printer Parity None
Data Bits 8 Hour Midnight only if 'Self start' is
Connection EIA232 enabled.
Apply Discard Timeout 250 ms Minute Any
Baud Rate 9600 First Start Char 0 Second Any
Stop Bits 1 Second Start Char 0 Duration 60 Seconds
Parity Even First End Char 13 Repeat after 0 Seconds
Modbus Master Second End Char 10 Job Number 1
Printer Type Star TSP600
Group 1 Category No Action
Printer Name Star TSP600(1) Port Serial 1
Group 2 Apply Discard
Printer Status Not Responding Link Error Count 0
Group 3
Reset Error Count Group 4
Printer Test
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Group 5
Print Messages From 1) Group 1 Protocol Modbus Master
Group 6
Messages To Print Connection EIA232
System Apply Discard
Baud Rate 19200
Alarms Stop Bits 1
Power Up
Parity None
General
Batches Timeout 1000 ms
Logins Enable error code B
Signings Enable Talk Through
Audit Trail
Apply Discard
Apply Discard
Page 61
User Guide
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 3
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Output Channel Number 1) Output 1
Page 62
Import Table eiptable See sheets 1 to 3 for Enable
Export Table eiptable previous Config items Output channels Master Comms
Output Type
User Guide
Status Online (Section 4.3.17)
Output channels Slave 1) Furn Recorder 2
I/O Table Inputs Server - - > Client
Demand Writes Parameter Comms Channel
Input 1 Channel.1.pv
Input 2 Channel.2.pv EtherNet/IP Scaling High/Low
Emails
Input 3 Channel.3.pv (Section 4.3.21) Scale Low 0
Input 4 Channel.4.pv Reports
Scale High 100
Input 5 Channel.5.pv EtherNet/IP Server Point Type Channel
Input 6 Ch
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
Apply Discard
Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 4
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
INSTRUMENT NAME
Allows the entry of an alphanumeric name for the recorder, up to 20 characters long. See section 3.3.1
for text entry techniques.
NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY
Allows normal and ‘saver’ display brightnesses to be defined. Defaults are Normal = 100%; Saver = 50%
SAVE AFTER
The number of minutes (between 1 and 99 inclusive), which are to elapse after a screen operation, before
the screen brightness changes from ‘normal’ to ‘saver’. Default is 30 minutes.
MODBUS ADDRESS
Allows a Modbus address between 1 and 247 to be set up, for use when the instrument is acting as a
Modbus slave.
PRESET MINUTE
Enter a minutes number between 0 and 59 for use with Clock Job - Preset clock.
Note: See section 4.7 for a description of recorder jobs, and section 4.5.1 for further details of
time synchronisation.
DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS
Checking this box prevents instrument alarm messages from appearing on the screen.
Any one of these predefined notes can be selected (as described in section 3.5) by touching the Opera-
tor Note area continuously for two seconds, then touching the required note from the picklist which ap-
pears. Once selected the predefined note can be edited before use, like a normal Operator Note. Such
editing does not affect the original note entered here in Instrument Configuration.
The production of alarm messages and the saving of group data to Flash memory, to removable memory
device and/or to remote computer (FTP transfer) can also be enabled / disabled from this menu.
Enable
Disable
TREND UNITS
Allows mm/hr or inches per hour to be selected for the ‘chart’ speed. Automatically converts the trend
speed field below.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows the group name to be edited. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
TREND TYPE
This allows the selection of Adaptive Recording for vertical and horizontal trend modes. The purpose
of adaptive recording is to ensure that rapid, short duration spikes (for example), are represented on the
‘chart’ even at low trend speeds. This allows the user to extend the total amount of history stored in the
recorder (by using slow trend speeds) without losing transient data.
The adaptive recording method works by measuring the input signal at the normal 125 msec period,
and saving the maximum and minimum values, continuously, over the period of trend update. When the
trend is updated, both maximum and minimum values are traced on the chart - i.e. two traces are pro-
duced for each channel in the group.
The faceplates and pen positions are still updated every second, as normal.
Notes:
1 During the period between updates, the maximum and minimum values are shown on the
trend as a horizontal line just beneath the pen, where the ends of the line represent the mini-
mum and maximum values so far. This line is removed at trend update time.
2. Adaptive recording takes twice as much memory as normal recording, so to maintain the total
amount of history stored, the trend speed must be reduced to 50% of that which would be
used for non-adaptive recording.
3. In Trend History mode, both minimum and maximum values for the cursor position are shown
on the faceplate. See section 3.4 for a description of trend history.
Figure 4.3.2b shows the difference between normal and adaptive recording, at slow trend rates. Note
that rapid changes in signal, (such as those shown in the circled area of the ‘actual signal’) are largely
filtered out by Normal Tracing, but is displayed by the Adaptive Trace. Figure 4.3.2b is for illustrative
purposes only, as traces such as these could never appear on the chart together.
Max/Min
bar
A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative values for Trend speed/interval and Recording speed/interval
to be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched-to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Trend Speed /Interval value can be entered. Trend Speed/Interval
‘A’ is used during normal operation. Trend Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described
in section 4.7.
Note: Trend speed/interval are not editable fields if ‘Circular Settings’ is enabled.
CIRCULAR SETTINGS
When checked, this checkbox causes the Circular Speed/Chart Full/Start At fields, described below, to
appear. When checked, the Trend Speed and Trend Interval fields described above are disabled (i.e.
they are no longer editable).
Note: If Circular Settings is not enabled, here in Group configuration, but Circular Trend is ena-
bled for the group in Views configuration (section 4.3.4), then, although the circular chart will ap-
pear, it is unlikely that the chart will contain any trends.
CIRCULAR SPEED
This field allows the chart speed to be selected from a pick list, as detailed in table 4.3.2, below. The
table also shows the number of major and minor chart divisions.
START AT
This item, (which appears only if ‘New Chart’ has been selected in ‘Circular Chart Full’, above) allows the
user to select a start time and/or date for the new chart. The exception is for a chart speed of 1 hr/rev,
which always starts on the hour.
NONE
No chart grid is traced.
LINEAR
The chart grid is linear, with the major and minor divisions defined by the fields Grid Divisions - Major and
Minor, which appear if ‘Linear’ is selected as grid type. Figure 4.3.2c, below, defines major and minor
divisions.
LOG
The chart grid is logarithmic, with the number of decades being selected in the ‘Grid Decades’ field
which appears if ‘Log’ is selected as Grid Type. Figure 4.3.2c gives an example.
Note: For the small frame recorder, the minor divisions within each decade are shown only for
groups with ‘Number of decades’ ≤ 5.
FROM POINT
This allows the chart grid to be aligned with the scale of a particular ‘point’, selected in the ‘from’ field
which appears if ‘From Point’ is selected as ‘Grid Type’
Five major divisions
Linear scale
Linear scale
Three decades
Log scale
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Recording Speed /Interval value can be entered. Recording Speed/
Interval ‘A’ is used during normal operation. Recording Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
Note: With large numbers of points configured in one or more groups, the total amount of data
generated per iteration may exceed the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory
in the time available. Such a situation may also arise if many messages are being generated. The
recorder responds by reducing the recording speed, and a message ‘Recording failed - internal
overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to
the situation.
TREND HISTORY DURATION
Gives an estimated time to fill the group’s trend history area of the Flash memory. The calculation is
based on the archive rate, the compression ratio, the flash size and on the exact nature of the data. (Rap-
idly changing values use more space than static/slowly changing values.) If A/B switching is enabled the
calculation is based on Recording Speed/Interval ‘A’.
Changing the contents of one group may affect the Trend History Duration of other groups. This hap-
pens because the recorder attempts to store, as nearly as possible, the same amount of history for all
groups, regardless of how many points there are in the groups.
For ‘empty’ groups, or if Recording is not enabled for a group, the Trend History Duration is displayed as
‘0’ Days.
Note: When recording to floppy disk drives (via a USB port), it is recommended that only one
group be set up with ‘Archive to media’ enabled. This is because history files are typically 400kB
in size and this limits the number of files which can be saved to a 1.4MB floppy disk, to three. If
more than one group is set up to archive, and if ‘Overwrite’ strategy is selected, then it is likely that
all the data for one or more of the groups will be lost. No warning is given.
ALARM MESSAGE
This box allows the printing of alarm on and off messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or disabled as re-
quired. Alarm messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH:MM:SS Alarm ON
n/m and HH:MM:SS Alarm OFF n/m, where ‘n’ is the relevant channel number and ‘m’ is the alarm number
(1 or 2).
ACK MESSAGE
This tick box allows the printing of alarm acknowledgement messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or
disabled as required. Acknowledge messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form
HH:MM:SS.
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
Alarms are acknowledged as described in section 3.1.4.
Notes:
1. The status of all points not included in the selection box, remains unchanged.
2. Point numbers are entered individually, or as one or more ranges, separated by commas (if ap-
plicable). For example, an entry of ‘1-3,6,9-11’ would cause points 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10 and 11 to be
added or removed from the group contents. Only numeric characters, commas and hyphens
(minus signs) are accepted. If any other character (including space(s)) is included in the list, the
edit will fail, with a message ‘Invalid Selection’ appearing when the ‘Enable’ or ‘Disable’ key is
operated..
3. Ranges must be complete: ‘1-’ is not acceptable.
4. Each group may contain any or all points, but for vertical and horizontal trend modes, only the
first 36 are displayed, and for circular trend mode, only the first twelve are traced..
5. If a point number is entered which is greater than the number of that point type fitted, then the
selection is ignored. For example, if totalisers 1-60 are selected for deletion, and only 12 are
enabled, then the range will be accepted, and totalisers 1 to 12 deleted from the group’s con-
tents.
Alternatively, a group’s contents can be edited using the tick-boxes, to include the ticked items in, or to
exclude non-ticked items from, the group, as required.
Scaled
Scale Low 0 V
These fields appear only if
Scale High 1 V
'Scaled' is selected.
Units V
Offset 0 V
Select: None, Linear or Log
Scale Type Linear (Log available only if 'Scaled' is ticked.)
Scale Divisions - Major 1 0
These fields vary with the type of scale selected
Scale Divisions - Minor 1
Select: None,
Filter None 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128 or 256 seconds
Descriptor Channel 1
A/B Switching Allows Span A high/low, Span B high/low, Zone A high/low,
Zone B high/low and Colour A/B values to be entered for use
Spanned by Trend jobs.
Span Low 0 V These fields appear only if
Span High 1 V 'Spanned' is selected.
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Pv Format Numeric Select Numeric or Scientific
Enable Unlatched
Relay Board 1
These fields vary according
to the selected job category
Relay Number 1
while Active
Apply Discard
Notes
1. Numeric values (e.g. ‘input low’) can be up to 10 characters including decimal point
2. Refer to section 3.3.1 for numeric and text entry techniques.
Note: The following description shows all possible fields. The recorder itself edits the list and
shows only those fields appropriate to the setup so far. For example, the ‘Shunt’ field appears only
for mA input type.
CHANNEL NUMBER
The current channel and its descriptor are displayed. Touching the window area allows another channel
to be selected for configuration. Alternatively, the right and left arrow keys at the bottom of the screen
can be used to increment and decrement, respectively, the channel number.
VALUE
Shows the current value of the channel, together with either ‘Unadjusted’ or the date and time of channel
adjustment (section 4.6.4).
INPUT TYPE
According to the options available, one of the following may be selected as input type: thermocouple,
millivolt, Volt, milliamp, RTD, Ohms, Digital (not channel 1, 7 etc.), Modbus Comms Input, Ethernet/IP
Comms Input, Test or Master Comms.
Select Modbus Comms Input if the channel is to be written-to via Modbus. Use Ethernet/IP if the channel
is to be written-to by an Ethernet/IP client. Master Comms must be selected if this channel is to be read
from another instrument.
Note: See section 4.3.16 for details of Master Comms, section 4.3.21 for details of the EtherNet/IP
option and section 4.3.15 for Modbus comms (Connections).
LIN TYPE
The following linearisation tables are available as standard:
Linear, square root, x3/2, x5/2, UserLin1, UserLin2, UserLin3, UserLin4 (see section 4.3.9 for user lin-
earisations)
Thermocouple types B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/NiCo, Platinel, Ni/NiMo, Pt20%Rh/
Pt40%Rh
Resistance thermometer (RTD) types Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A, JPT100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
For input ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermocouple/RTD tables, see Annex A.
INPUT HIGH
Enter the highest value to be applied across the input terminals (e.g. 20.00).
SHUNT
Allows a shunt resistor value to be entered for input type = mA. Commonly used values are 100 ohms
and 250 ohms. Note that shunt resistors are connected to the input connector. The recorder cannot
detect whether a shunt is fitted, or if one is, what value it has. Therefore it is the responsibility of the user
to ensure that the ohmic value of any shunt fitted matches the shunt value entered in this field.
RANGE LOW
Enter the lowest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 100)
RANGE HIGH
Enter the highest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 200)
RANGE UNITS
Selectable from degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin or Rankine.
SCALED
This box allows the user to select low and high values and units for a scale. This box must be ticked if
logarithmic scales are to be used.
SCALE LOW
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range low (e.g. 0).
SCALE HIGH
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range high (e.g. 100).
SCALE UNITS
Note:
User linearisation tables units,
To set user linearisation table units to temperature units (˚C for example), the Range Units selec-
tion box can be used.
To enter custom units, ‘Scaled’ must be selected. Scale low must be set to Range Low; Scale
high must be set to Range High. The required Units string is entered in the Scale units text
entry box.
OFFSET
Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable. Recorder accuracy figures
no longer apply if an offset is included.
If the TUS option is fitted (section 15), Offset can not be applied to channels used as reference channels
(e.g. channels 6, 12, 18 etc.).
NONE
Channels with Scale Type selected to ‘None’, appear with no scale information in any display mode.
LINEAR
Channels with Scale Type = Linear, appear with scale information in all display modes (except numeric).
The number of major and minor divisions can be selected from subsequent fields. Examples are shown
in figure 4.3.3b1.
Appears for Linear Scale types only. Setting major divisions to 1, means that the scale consists only of
‘zero’ and full scale. Setting Major divisions to 2, means that the scale has divisions at zero, 50% and full
scale, and so on. Intermediate scale values appear at major divisions if there is sufficient space. Default =
10 for large frame recorders or 5 for small frame units.
Appears for Linear Scale types only. With minor divisions set to 1 (default), the scale major divisions are
not divided i.e. no minor division tick marks appear . Setting Minor divisions to 2, means that each major
scale division is divided into two, and so on. See figure 4.3.3b1 for an example showing five minor divi-
sions.
LOG
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions at
each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples are
shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0 can
be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as exponental curves (figure 4.3.3b2).
LOG/LINEAR
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log/Linear, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions
at each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples
are shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0
can be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as straight lines (figure 4.3.3b2).
5 minor
divisions
Scale = Log
Number format = Scientific (1.00 x100 to 1.00 x106)
Channel 2 388.33V
1.00E0 1.00E1 1.00E2 1.00E3 1.00E4 1.00E5 1.00E6
Scale = Log
Number format = Numeric (1.00 to 1,000,000.00 )
Channel 2 388.33V
1.00 10.00 100.00 1000.00 10000.00 100000.00 1000000.00
Channel 47 41.6667V
0.0000 10.0000 20.0000 30.0000 40.0000 50.0000 60.0000 70.0000 80.0000 90.0000 100.0000
10:44:18
25/05/06
10:42:58
4 minute triangle 25/05/06
10:40:18
25/05/06
Channel 47 41.6667V
0.0000 10.0000 20.0000 30.0000 40.0000 50.0000 60.0000 70.0000 80.0000 90.0000 100.0000
10:49:18
25/05/06
10:47:58
4 minute triangle 25/05/06
10:45:18
25/05/06
Channel 47 41.4250
V 100.0000
1.0000 10.0000
11:57:21
25/05/06
11:56:00
25/05/06
4 minute triangle
Log Scale - Log Grid 11:54:40
25/05/06
11:53:20
25/05/06
Channel 47 6.4158V
100.0000
1.0000 10.0000
12:13:21
25/05/06
12:12:00
25/05/06
44minute
minutetriangle
triangle
Log/Linear
Log/LinearScale
Scale--Log
LogGrid
Grid 12:10:40
25/05/06
12:09:20
25/05/06
Figure 4.3.3b2 Trace examples for different scale types (large frame)
Note: Grid type is selected in Group configuration. Grid (and chart text) colour is defined in
‘Trend Foreground’ in System/Customisation configuration
INTERNAL
Internal CJC is by means of an RTD connected across pins 11 and 12 of the input board connector.
EXTERNAL
If the cold junction is maintained (by the user) at a known, fixed Break Response None
temperature, ‘external’ should be selected. An extra numeric Cold Junction Type External
entry box appears to allow the user to enter the temperature at External CJ Temp 0
which the cold junction is maintained. Descriptor Channel 1
REMOTE
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string of up to 30 characters (including spaces) to be entered for the channel descriptor (e.g.
‘Turbine 2 tempA’).
A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative Span, Zone and Trace Colour values to be entered. ‘A’ values
are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of span low and span high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ZONE
This allows the portion of the chart which the channel occupies to be defined in terms of percent, where
the left edge of the chart is 0% and the right hand edge is 100%. For example, setting a low value of 50
and a high value of 100 causes the channel trace to be confined to the right hand half of the chart.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of zone low and zone high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
PV FORMAT
This allows the PV value, alarm setpoints, hysteresis values etc. to be displayed as normal numeric val-
ues (Numeric) or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed and
entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by a multiplier (the exponent).
E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the
number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a
number between 1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
COLOUR
Allows the trace colour to be selected from a colour chart. Each of the 56 available colours is displayed
with a number, and it is this number which is entered. The background colour to the selection box chang-
es to the selected colour.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second colour selection can be entered. Colour ‘A’ is used during normal
operation. Colour ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ALARM NUMBER
Allows an alarm to be selected for configuration.
With the above settings, an absolute high alarm would become active if its input were to rise above 100
and would remain active until its value fell to below 95 units. An absolute low alarm would become active
if its input fell below 100 units, and would remain active until its input rose above 105 units. Deviation
alarms behave in a similar manner.
The recorder uses its iteration rate of 125 msec (1/8th second) as the time base for it calculations. For our
example, 3 degrees per minute equates to 3/60 degrees per second or 3/(60 x 8) = 0.00625 degrees per
iteration. If a change greater than this is detected, then the alarm becomes active.
In order to reduce sensitivity, an averaging period can be configured. This means that an average of all
the 1/8th second samples is taken over the specified period, and the alarm becomes active only if the
average value exceeds the specified rate of change.
Configuring a dwell time can also reduce ‘jitter’ because, if during the specified dwell time, any one sam-
ple is non active, then the elapsed dwell time is reset to zero. The alarm becomes active only after the
dwell time has elapsed i.e. only if the rate of change has been exceeded for every software cycle through-
out the specified dwell time.
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Input signal Threshold
Hysteresis: no Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs Dwell: 0 secs
D D D D D D D D D D D D
Hysteresis: no Hysteresis: no
Dwell: D secs Dwell: D secs
Hysteresis: no D D D D Hysteresis: no D D D D
Dwell: D secs Dwell: D secs
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the channel value changes by more than 1 amount unit in less than 1 time
unit. Dwell delays the alarm-on time. Averaging removes the effects of spurious 'spikes'.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment coun-
ter).
Figure 4.3.3g, below, shows the various actions graphically. For ‘While unacknowledged’ and ‘on ac-
knowledgement’ settings, two cases are shown, one where the alarm goes inactive before acknowledge-
ment; the other where the alarm is acknowledged whilst the alarm is still active. The coloured (shaded)
areas show the duration for which continuous jobs run; the down arrows show trigger points for ‘one-
shot’ jobs. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms.
Active Active
Alarm trigger Alarm trigger
Inactive Inactive
Acknowledge Acknowledge
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged (latching alarm)
(latching alarm)
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged Job goes inactive even if Job triggers even if alarm
(non-latching alarm)
(non-latching alarm) alarm not yet acknowledged not yet acknowledged
Acknowledge Acknowledge
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged Job goes inactive even if Job triggers even if
(latching alarm) alarm still active
(latching alarm) alarm still active
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged
(non-latching alarm)
(non-latching alarm)
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm on/off and alarm acknowledge message printing on the chart can be enabled/disabled as a part
of ‘Group configuration’ described in section 4.3.2. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge
alarms.
Home Group and Home Page picklists allow a group and display mode to be defined for display when
the Home key is pressed in the Root menu.
HOME TIMEOUT
The recorder returns to the specified home page after the timeout value of minutes has elapsed since the
last touch on the display. Timeout action is inhibited if a configuration is incomplete (there are changes
which have not been ‘Applied’), or if a system-generated message (e.g. ‘Clock Failure’) is on display. User
displays (e.g. Root menu) are timed-out after approximately 50 seconds.
A value of zero disables the time-out function. Valid entries are between 1 and 99 minutes.
HOME GROUP
This picklist allows a particular group to be selected for display when the root menu ‘Home’ key is
pressed.
SCOPE
The remaining items of Views configuration can be selected to act globally (Instrument) or to act on indi-
vidual groups (Group). When ‘Instrument’ is selected, enabled display modes appear in all groups’ up/
down arrow scroll lists and are active in the Root Menu ‘Goto View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b). When ‘Group’
is selected, each group can be set up with individual display mode lists. For the particular group on dis-
play, the up and down arrow keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes, or a particu-
lar mode can be selected using the ‘Goto View’ menu.
DISPLAY ENABLE
This field appears only if ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’, and allows the selected group to be enabled or disa-
bled for display. When enabled, the group can be displayed either by using the ‘Root menu/Goto
screens/Group N’ selection (figure 4.3.4b) or can be scrolled-to using the right/left arrow keys. When
disabled, the group is ‘greyed’ in the ‘Root menu/Goto screens/Group N’ selection and is skipped when
using the right/left arrow keys. It is not possible to disable the Home group.
HOME PAGE
Allows a particular display mode to be selected as the default display, either for all groups (Scope = in-
strument) or on a group-by-group basis (Scope = group).
Note: If Circular Trend view is enabled here in Views configuration, but the ‘Circular settings’
checkbox is not enabled in Group configuration (section 4.3.2), then, although the circular chart
will appear, it will not contain any trends.
This field appears only for recorders with the Screen Builder option (fully described in section 7). Up to
24 user screens can be included in the up/down arrow scroll list and to be active in the Root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b).
In addition to the 24 screens accessible from the recorder display, up to 100 extra screens, which can be
accessed only by using Bridge ‘Full’ software, can be specified. The number selected should be kept to
the minimum necessary, in order to reduce the number of ‘Goto View’ ‘More...’ displays. Once created
a Bridge screen can be copied to one or more recorder screens 1 to 24 if required, making it accessible
from the recorder.
Root Menu
Home Operator
The recorder uses a dedicated area of its Flash memory as an archive data buffer, which means that data
is written to the memory device or remote PC only when required, rather than continuously.
In order to carry out a successful remote archive, details of the remote host must be entered both in this
Archive section of the ‘Config’ menu, and in Network configuration (section 4.5). Further, the current ac-
cess level must have ‘Connect from remote’ enabled in the Security/Access menu (section 4.4.1).
Apply Discard
Remote path / r e c o r d e r / G r o u p 1
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
Primary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Secondary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Apply Discard
Note: Where very high values are involved (e.g. some totaliser values) ‘High’ compression may
cause the value displayed by the recorder, and held in the history file, to be incorrect. This prob-
lem may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by
re-scaling the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
FLASH SIZE
Allows the size of the internal flash memory to be viewed by the user.
If there is more than one group with the same Shortest Trend History Duration, the group with the lowest
number is displayed. (E.G. If groups two and four both have the same duration, ‘Group 2’ will appear in
this window.)
Note: Trend history duration depends on many factors, as described in Group Configuration (sec-
tion 4.3.2) above.
CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT
These appear only if the ‘Media File Format’ or ‘FTP file format’ are set to either ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’.
Refer to ‘CSV Files’ at the end of this subsection (4.3.5).
SHOW
This allows the fields which are to appear below ‘Show’ to be applicable to the local memory device (Lo-
cal Settings), or to the setting up of a remote host path for archiving purposes (Remote settings). The
following descriptions contain all the fields which may appear in either menu.
MEDIA
For ‘Local’ setting only
For standard recorders, this allows ‘mediacard or ‘usbfront’’ to be selected as the local archive destina-
tion. If the USB option is fitted, the two rear USB ports (usb1 and usb2) also appear in the pick list. USB
ports may support both floppy disk drives and ‘memory sticks’.
ON MEDIA FULL
For ‘Local’ setting only:
Overwrite Oldest data is replaced with latest data when storage medium is full.
Stop Archiving stops when the storage medium is full.
Note: When in ‘Overwrite’ mode, the recorder will overwrite only those files which it has itself
created. Thus, if a storage medium is inserted which contains history files from another recorder,
these cannot be overwritten. The file names are of the form UUU....UUUIIIIIIFFGGSSSSSS, where
IIIIII represent the lowest three bytes of MAC address of the recorder which created the file (see
section 4.5.1). It is not possible for the user to delete files created by another instrument (i.e. one
with a different MAC address).
MEDIA SIZE
For ‘Local’ setting only, this displays the capacity of the memory device.
REMOTE PATH
For Remote setting only, this specifies the route to a folder or directory on the remote host, set up as a
part of that host’s FTP configuration. The path name may be up to 103 characters in length.
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5 Mb
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 8 . 8 6 Days
CSV include Values
CSV include Messages
CSV include Header details
CSV include Column headings
CSV Date/Time format Text
CSV use Tab delimiter
Show Local settings
Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
On Media Full Overwrite
Media Size 30.4746094 Mb
Disk Archive Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply Discard
CSV format is a standard open-file format for numeric data. A simple ASCII-based format, it is readable
by a wide range of PC applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial data-
bases. CSV files have the extension ‘.csv’.
Note: CSV is ASCII based, and cannot interpret Unicode characters. Some characters available to
the user will therefore be displayed incorrectly in CSV files.
If ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’ is selected, a number of extra check boxes appear. Figure 4.3.5c above,
shows a typical menu page. Figure 4.3.5d below, shows the effects of enabling the CSV check boxes,
with the exception of ‘CSV use Tab delimiter’ the use of which is as follows:
Despite its name, CSV does not always use commas as separators.
For example, in some countries, the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period), whilst in other ar-
eas, a comma is used. In order to avoid confusion between the comma as a decimal point and the comma
as a separator, a different separator is used, usually the semicolon.
The instrument automatically chooses a separator suitable for use with the ‘Locale’ selected in System
Configuration (section 4.6.2). ‘CSV Use Tab delimiter’ allows the user to override this choice, and force
the instrument to use tabs as separators. This can be particularly useful when moving the data from one
locale to another.
Click/drag separator
to edit field width
A1 = Instrument
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
1 Instrument Name= Distil temp Serial Number 9921 4.0
Software Version Timezone= GMT
2 Mac Address00:AB:8D:80:26:C0 Language= en Country= GB
3 Group Name Tank Temps
4 Tank1 Temp1 Low= 0 High= 40 -C
5 Tank1 Temp2 Low= 0 High= 40 -C Include header
6 Tank1 Temp3 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C details
7 Tank2 Temp1 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C
8 Tank2 Temp2 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C
9 Tank2 Temp3 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C
10 Difference Low= -20 High= +20 Deg C
11 Date/Time Tank1 Temp1 Tank1 Temp1 Tank1 Temp1
Tank2 Temp1Tank2 Temp2 Difference
Tank2 Temp3
12 -C -C Deg C Deg C Deg C Deg C Deg C
Include column
headings
13 09.39.0 23.49 23.74 24.01 31.2334 29.7693 30.0983 6.61
14 09.44.0 23.53 23.70 23.88 30.6458 29.0673 29.9083 6.13
15 09.49.0 23.57 23.68 23.91 30.0945 28.8936 29.9083 5.91
Include values
16 09.54.0 23.50 23.69 23.99 31.1437 29.4387 30.0235 6.47
17 09.54.0 08/04/05 14:09:54 Alarm off
18 End of Archive
19
20 Right click, then: Include messages
21 Format cells...
22 Select 'Time' as number category
23 Select time/date 'Type' as required
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Tank Temps~8026C026000002A9
Ready
Descriptor Event 1
Job Number 1 Select job number
Apply Discard
EVENT NUMBER
SOURCE TYPES
Note: Event sources associated with options appear only if those options are fitted.
Allows source 1 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 1’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 1’).
Example: Source 1 is alarm 1 on channel 3
With Source 1 Sense = Source 1, the event is active whenever channel 3 alarm 1 is active.
With Source 1 Sense = Not Source 1, the event is active whenever the alarm is not active.
SOURCE 2 SENSE
Allows source 2 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 2’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 2’).
Example: Source 2 is Group 1 Batch Running
With Source 2 Sense = Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is running.
With Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is not running.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string to be entered as the event title. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
JOB NUMBER
Select the required job number for this event.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment counter).
See also figure 4.3.3g and associated text.
EVENT EXAMPLE
An event is to be active whenever Channel 1 Alarm 1 is active whilst Channel 3 alarm 2 is not active.
Source 1 = Point alarm (On = Channel 1; Alarm = 1)
Source 2 = Point alarm (On = Channel 3; Alarm = 2)
Source 1 Sense = Source 1
Operator = And
Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2
It is possible to achieve the same result by inverting both Source senses and using the Nor operator.
The Event Button configuration menu allows a number of ‘Push-Buttons’ to be set up for use as event
sources. Buttons can be defined as ‘Unlatched’ (push = on; release = off) or ‘Latched’ (push once = on;
push again = off etc.).
Event buttons are independent of the Security Management option, described in section 4.4.2. This al-
lows individual buttons to be a) entirely open to the user, b) to require signing, or c) to require both sign-
ing and authorization, as required.
Descriptor Button 1
Type Latched Select Latched or Unlatched
Text Off Text Enter button text
Latched Text On Text Enter latched text
(appears only if Type = latched)
Require Signing
Require Authorisation
Apply Discard
Notes:
1 ‘Require Signing’ and ‘Require Authorisation’ appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
2. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, a message appears on the chart after authorization and/
or signing are complete. The example below shows the message when both Signing and Au-
thorisation are enabled.
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Button Descriptor,Signed:Engineer,Authorised:Engineer,Note
4.3.8 Messages
This feature allows messages to be sent, by job action (section 4.7), to the display, to a specified group or
to all groups. Messages can also be included in e-mails (section 4.3.19). The messages are of the form:
Date, Time, Message. The message can be just text (up to 80 characters), or it can include up to nine em-
bedded items which are typed into the message as {1} to {9}. The embedded values represented by {1} to
{9} are selected from picklists.
If a Group-destination message contains more characters than can be displayed on the screen (depends
on recorder model), the right-hand part of the message is invisible to the user. The message appears in
full in the message log (section 3.1.4) and when Review Software is used. Display-destination messages
are always fully visible.
MESSAGE ENTRY
The message configuration page is shown below in figure 4.3.8 The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Apply Discard
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Message Number Select the required message from the picklist.
Message Enter the message by using the pop-up keyboards (section 3.3.1)
Replace {n} with A picklist allowing the user to select data to be embedded in the message:
Source Descriptor: The descriptor of the source which triggers the job message.
Source Value: The instantaneous value of the source at trigger time.
Source Alarm Data: Details (see table 4.3.8) of the source alarm at message trigger
time.
Alarm Type Embedded details
Absolute Enable, Type (high or low), Threshold, Status
Deviation Enable, Type (in or out), Reference, Deviation, Status
Rate of change Enable, Type (rise or fall), Amount, Change time, Status
Note: If any of ‘Source Descriptor’, ‘Source Value’ or ‘Source Alarm Data’ are embedded in a mes-
sage which is triggered by a job which cannot be associated with a specific source (e.g. event,
timer), then the embedded value will be: ?????.
(Continued)
{n} source This field appears only if the previous field (Replace {n} with) is selected as ‘Specified
Descriptor’, ‘Specified Value’ or ‘Specified alarm data’. The associated picklist(s) allow
a specific point, and a specific alarm (if appropriate) to be selected. It is thus possi-
ble to configure, say alarm 1 on channel 2, to produce a message giving the descrip-
tor and/or value of, say, totaliser 1.
Notes:
1. n = 1 to 9
2. The example below is intended to clarify message entry techniques.
To configure Message 2 to read “The value of Chan two = (Value channel 2) & Tot one = (Value totaliser
1)”
In Messages configuration:
1. Select Message 2.
2. Access the Symbols keyboard (section 3.3.1) and enter, without spaces, {}={}&{}={}
3. Access the Numeric keyboard and insert 1, 2, 3, 4 within the braces to give: {1}={2}&{3}={4}
4. Access the Alphabet keyboard, and insert text and spaces: The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}
5. Set ‘Replace {1}’ to “Source Descriptor’
6. Set ‘Replace {2}’ to ‘Source Value’
7. Set ‘Replace {3}’ to ‘Specified Descriptor’
8. Set ‘{3} source’ to Tot one
9. Set ‘Replace {4}’ to ‘Specified Value’
10. Set ‘{4} source’ to ‘Tot one’
The result of this is that, should the channel 2 alarm go active, the following message would be sent to all
groups, appear on the ‘chart’ and become part of all groups’ histories:
18/10/01 11:19:58 The value of Chan two = 6.0˚C & Tot one = 3383.8073 Units
Note: On some models, the message may be wider than the screen. If necessary, the message
can be shortened (e.g. use ‘Ch2’ instead of ‘Chan two’), or it can be viewed in full, either in Mes-
sage log, (section 3.1.4) or by using Review Software, if available.
Notes:
1. Each Y value must be unique - i.e. there cannot be more than one X value with the same Y value
assigned to it.
2. Each X value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
3. Each Y value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
4. To specify units other than temperature units, the channel ‘scaled’ facility must be used. The
scale low/high values should be set to be the same as the range low/high values, and the re-
quired units entered
The import/export Linearisation tables feature described in ‘Save/Restore’ (section 4.2) offers an alterna-
tive way of entering linearisation tables.
Figure 4.3.9a shows the default configuration page. Figure 4.3.9b shows a simple table for relating water
depth to water volume for a cylindrical tank with a conical bottom.
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
User Linearisation Allows a user linearisation table to be selected for configuration.
Descriptor Allows the user to enter a name of up to 20 characters (including spaces) for the table.
Format This allows the point pair values to be entered as normal numeric values (Numeric)
or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed
and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by
a multiplier (the exponent). E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered
would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal
point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between
1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4. Figure 4.3.9b,
below, gives further examples.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
3 metres
2 metres
30
20
10
0 X
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Depth (metres)
Figure 4.3.9b Sample User Linearisation table.
Batches can be defined as start/stop, or continuous and can incorporate all channels, or just those associ-
ated with a specified Group. For start/stop batches, the batch record starts when the batch is started,
and continues until it is stopped. For continuous batches, the batch record starts when the batch is
started and continues until the next batch is started, or until batch recording is disabled.
When using ‘PC review’ software the ‘Go to Batch’ feature can be used to select a particular batch record.
If ‘ Name files by Batch’ is enabled a separate history file is created for each batch.
Where DD/MM/YY is the date, HH:MM:SS is the time, and User Full name is either the current user name,
the security level (e.g. Engineer) or ‘Automatic’ if the batch has been initiated by job, or ‘Modbus’ if trig-
gered remotely. A similar message is printed at Batch Stop. (There are no stop messages associated
with continuous batch selection).
In addition to the above start/stop messages, up to six lines of text can, if required, be printed on the
‘chart’ at the start of a batch and, if required, at the end of a batch. The messages are in two parts,
which for the sake of this document, are called ‘Headings’ and ‘Values’ The Headings are entered in
Fields 1 to 6 in Batch Configuration. The Values associated with these headings are entered by the op-
erator at initiation.
AUDITOR MESSAGES
If either Auditor option is fitted a Config/Security Revision message appears immediately after the Batch
Start message:
BATCH SUMMARY
A Batch Summary page can be displayed from the Summary menu described in section 3.1.4, above.
SCOPE
Allows the user to define all configured channels (instrument) or just those in a particular group, for batch
control. If ‘Group’ is selected, a further picklist appears allowing a specific group to be selected.
ENABLE
Allows the batch function to be switched on or off.
BATCH MODE
Allows batch mode to be selected as Continuous or Start/Stop.
Allows the number of messages to be printed at batch start/stop to be selected between one and six.
FIELD 1
This field is the first of up to six which can be used as headings for batch information. Headings can be up
to 20 characters long (including spaces). In the example shown in Figure 4.3.10a, Heading 1 (Field 1) has
the entry ‘Batch Number:’. When initiating the batch, the operator has to enter a value to be associated
with this heading (see below), unless ‘Use Counter’ is selected in the following ‘Batch Number’ field.
BATCH NUMBER
This allows the Value entered for Field 1’s heading to be selected as ‘Use Text’ or ‘Use Counter’.
USE TEXT When Text is selected, the value for field 1 is entered by the operator on initiation of
the batch.
USE COUNTER When Counter is selected, a further field appears (‘counter’) allowing a specific coun-
ter to be selected from a picklist. The selected counter initiates a new batch when-
ever it changes value, and the counter value is appended to the text associated with
Field 1 (but see note 2). See section 4.3.13 for details of counters.
Notes:
1. Start batch is initiated on any change in counter value - not just increment.
2. It is recommended that when ‘Use Counter’ is selected, then only counter 1 be used as the
batch initiator. Other counters may be selected, but operation is not guaranteed.
FIELDS 2 TO 6
Fields 2 to 6 are also used as headings for batch information. Values for these headings must be entered
by the operator prior to Batch initiation. See also ‘On new clear’, below. Headings can be up to 20 char-
acters long (including spaces).
ON START LOG
This defines how many of the selected Fields are to be printed at batch start. An entry of ‘1’ means that
only Field 1 will be printed. An entry of ‘2’ means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used, and so on. An entry of
0 means that only the ‘Batch Start’ message will be printed. It is not possible to print only, say, Field 3. If
Field 3 is required, it must be preceded by Fields 1 and 2.
ON STOP LOG
As for On start log, above, but for batch stop. This item appears only if Start/Stop is selected as batch
mode.
ON NEW CLEAR
For ‘Use Text’ Batches only, this allows the user to clear none or more of the batch entries at each batch
start. In the example above, if the user enters a batch number of say 050825.001, with Customer Name:
FishesRus, Operator name: Marvin, Supervisor: Fred, then setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘1’, causes the batch
number to be cleared, and to have to be re-entered, each time a new batch is started.
In a similar way, setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘2’ means that the batch number value and the Customer
Name: value to be cleared. A new batch cannot be started without new values first being entered.
As an aid to identification, if ‘Name Files by Batch’ is selected, the Batch Name, as entered by the opera-
tor, is inserted into the history file name. For example, if a batch name of 060511.001 is amongst the
items archived to disk, then this file will appear in the form:
Group Name~060511.001~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
Where YYYYMMDD is the date (e.g.20060511 = 11th May 2006) and HH----HH is a 16 digit hex code*
used by the recorder and by review software to identify the file. If name files by batch is not selected, the
Batch name is not included, and the file appears as:
Group Name~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
*The HHH--HHH code contains the following information:
PRE CALIBRATION
This item appears only if the TUS option is fitted. When enabled, the user must carry out an input adjust
procedure prior to batch start. If Audit Trail is enabled, messages appear on the chart for each channel
adjusted:
05/10/10 11:22:09 1) Channel 1 Pre cal high 4.998, Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 11:22:00 1) Channel 1 Pre cal low 0.998, Post cal low 1.000
POST CALIBRATION
As above, for Pre calibration, but when enabled, the adjust procedure must be carried out on batch stop.
This section describes how the operator initiates a new batch. Batches can be initiated from any of the
trend, bargraph or numeric display modes, but the start/stop and other messages appear only on the
Vertical Trend screen, in the trend history display and in Message Log. Batch information and status are
retained whilst power is off.
*Notes:
1. The option menu is context sensitive, so its appearance may differ from the example shown.
2. Batches can also be started and stopped from the Batch Summary page as described in sec-
tion 3.1.4.
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Enter History
New Close
‘Values’ can now be entered for these headings by entering strings of up to 60 characters (including
spaces).
This may be done by touching the empty field and using the resulting pop-up keyboard to type-in the
entry, or by touching the field continuously for two seconds or more and then selecting one of the prede-
fined Batch Entry messages previously entered in the configuration page. In the latter case, the prede-
fined message may be edited in the normal way before being Applied. Such editing has no effect on the
original message.
Once the entries are complete, operation of the Start button initiates batch recording. Operation of the
Store button saves the configuration for later initiation by job, by counter or via MODBUS/TCP.
The Values entry page is replaced by the batch status page (figure 4.3.10c), this time showing details of
the batch in progress. This page allows the batch to be stopped or a new one triggered.
Note: Text may also be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port behind the
access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the instrument
(section 2.2).
Batch - Furnace1 Temps
Supervisor:
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Batch - Group 1
The messages are displayed on the Graph Trend display as shown in figure 4.3.10d, below. This figure
uses the example given in the previous sections, and uses only four messages. Further messages would
appear above message 4. The figure also shows that time and date are added to the messages, and that
the currently running batch number is given in the Group name area. Touching this area calls the Batch
status page. In this job-triggered batch, the alarm triggering the job also appears (as shown).
Engineer
Group 1 12:14:17
Batch Number 050822.001 22/08/05
Channel 1 Touching this area calls the 700.87
400.00 480.00 560.00 batch status
640.00 page 720.00 800.00
Batch trigger source
12:13:46
22/08/05 12:14:31 Alarm(s) on 3(1) 22/08/05
22/08/05 12:14:31 Supervisor: Fred
22/08/05
22/08/05
12:14:31
12:14:31
Operator Name: Marvin
Customer name: FishesRus
Operator entries
22/08/05 12:14:31 Batch number: 050822.001
22/08/05 12:14:31 Config Revision:48 Security Revision 1
22/08/05 12:14:31 Batch start (Automatic)
12:08:26
22/08/05
JOB INITIATION
As described in section 4.7.9, a job can be set up to initiate a batch whenever the job source becomes
active. If ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’ a specific group can be selected (default = Group 1) and the job will act
only on the batch associated with this group. Batch ‘Start’ jobs automatically start the batch using the
entries made during the ‘Store’ function, described above. ‘Display Batch Dialog’ jobs allow the user to
enter the field values manually, before the job starts.
COUNTER INITIATION
If Batch Number is selected as ‘Use Counter’, then a new batch will automatically be started whenever the
selected counter changes value (increment, decrement or preset). The new value of the counter is used
as the value associated with Field 1.
For the other fields to have values printed on the chart, these must have been entered as described
above for Operator initiation, then the ‘Store’ button touched.
The ‘On new clear’ setting is ignored, the stored values being used each new batch.
MODBUS INITIATION
In order to initiate batch recording via MODBUS/TCP, a Batch Start flag has to be set (value = 0001). For
Scope = Group, the flag for the specified group must be set. For Scope = Instrument any group’s Batch
Start flag may be used.
The address of the flag for group 1 is decimal 42364; the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}
If Batch mode = Start/Stop, batches can also be stopped via MODBUS. The address for group 1 is 42365;
the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}. Again the value must be set to 0001.
EVENT SOURCES
As described in section 4.3.6 , ‘Batch Start’, ‘Batch Running’ and ‘Batch Stop’ can be selected as event
sources. If ‘Scope’ = ‘Group’ in Configuration (described above), then the user can select which group’s
batch is to be used as the event source.
4.3.11 Maths
CONFIGURATION
This feature allows a range of mathematical functions to be performed. Figure 4.3.11a shows a typical
configuration page - the selected maths function determines which configuration fields actually appear.
Select maths
Maths Number 1) Fo 1 channel number
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11a Maths configuration menu (typical - varies from function to function)
MATHS NUMBER
Allows the user to select the required maths channel for configuration. The maximum number of maths
channels is selected in the Virtual channels section of the Configuration/Options display, described in
section 4.3.22 .
VALUE
This field shows the current value of the selected maths channel. If the channel has not yet been config-
ured, the value reads ‘Off’.
RESET NOW
This button appears only after a resettable function has been selected. Operation of the button sets the
maths value to zero.
Log Base 10 Takes log10 of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.3010)
Log Base e Takes loge of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.6931)
e to the power Takes natural antilog of input. (For example: Input = 0.6931 gives maths function
value = 2)
Modulus This function copies the magnitude of the input value, without the sign. For example,
the modulus of value +100 = +100; the modulus of -100 = +100.
Channel Maximum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Minimum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Average Takes the average value of the selected channel over a specified time period. The
time period must be a multiple of 125 msecs. For example, a period of 0.2 seconds
would be rejected, but a period of 0.25 seconds would be accepted.
Master comms Allows a maths channel to read point values from other instruments on the Modbus
link.
Rate of change Produces a value for the speed at which a signal changes over a specified period.
O2 Correction This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous
Emissions Monitoring applications.
Relative Humidity This uses wet and dry bulb temperatures and atmospheric pressure inputs to pro-
duce a percentage Relative Humidity reading.
Zirconia probe Allows oxygen concentration and oxygen potential to be determined by solving the
Nernst oxygen equation.
Timestamp When triggered by an event or alarm job, this causes the current number of millisec-
onds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1970 to appear as the function value. If the se-
lected PV format is date or time, the result is displayed as date or time, respectively.
Config Revision Number*
Allows the Configuration Revision number to be used as the input to a maths chan-
nel. When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the
Configuration Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
Security Revision Number*
Allows the Security Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel.
When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the Security
Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
*Note: See ‘About’ in section 4.6 for a description of the Configuration and Security Revision num-
bers.
The ‘zero’ and full scale values for the maths function, as displayed. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’
values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
FUNCTION DETAILS
POLYNOMIAL FIT
A0 + A1(X) + A2(X2) + A3(X3) + A4(X4) + A5(X5) + A6(X6) + A7(X7) + A8(X8) where X is the value of the
source channel and A0 to A8 are constants. Figure 4.11.3b shows the configuration items for a third order
fit with channel 2 used as the source (X), and A0 = 1, A1 = 2, A2 = 3 and A3 = 4.
To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature (for temperatures below, at and above Steriliz-
ing Temperature) both in dry (FH) and steam (FO) sterilizing environments, using the following equation:
ma t −Target temp
User configuration consists of entering the channel which is measuring temperature, the relevant steriliz-
ing temperature and temperature interval (Z-value) and a low cut-off value, if required.
Figure 4.3.11c shows the configuration fields for measuring Fo, using channel 1 as the temperature input
channel, Fo values for target temperature (121.1˚C) and z-value (10˚C), and 75˚C as the low cut-off value,
below which killing credits are not to be counted.
Function fValue
F value of Channel 1
Sterilizing Temp 121.1
Temperature interval 10
Low cut off 75
APPLICATION NOTE
To ensure that sterilizer loads which contain materials with differing thermal inertias are thoroughly steri-
lized, a typical sterilizer has up to 12 different measuring points within the load. To ensure accuracy, the
temperature sensors should be calibrated, and the channel adjustment facility used to compensate for
any inaccuracies found.
If each of the inputs is used to compute an F value, each of these values can then be used as an input to a
Group Minimum function, with a high absolute alarm set at the correct F value. The alarm output can be
used to sound a warning, or an associated relay can be linked into the autoclave control system to signify
the end of a sterilization cycle.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equations solved is:
K Flow t × AbsPt
QM t = ×
Rg × Z Temp
where, QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’
K = Scaling factor (see below)
Rg = Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below)
Z = Compressibility factor (see below)
Flow t = Measured value from the flow meter at time ‘t’
AbsP t = Absolute pressure of the fluid at time ‘t’ in kPa(A)
Temp = Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins
Scaling factor This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known Flow, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constant The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For conven-
ience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, below.
RG
Gas
(J/kg-K)
Air 287.1
Ammonia 488.2
Carbon dioxide 188.9
Carbon monoxide 296.8
Ethylene 296.4
Hydrogen 4116.0
Methane 518.4
Nitrogen 296.8
Oxygen 259.8
Propane 188.5
Steam 461.4
P 1
Z= ×
T ρ
where: Z = Compressibility factor
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
ρ = gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Figure 4.3.11d shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Linear Mass
Flow’ function selected.
Flow Allows the input channel measuring the flowmeter output to be entered
Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) to be entered
Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Scale o/p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Ma Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
Gas Constant the relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
Z The compressibility factor described above.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
K2 DeltaPt × AbsPt
QM t = ×
Rg × Z Temp
Scaling factor This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known DeltaP, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constant The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For conven-
ience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, above.
Compressibility factor (Z-Factor)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas devi-
ates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and
is given by the equation:
P 1
Z= ×
T ρ
where: Z = Compressibility factor
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
ρ = gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Figure 4.3.11e shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Root Mass
Flow’ function selected.
Delta Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the differential pressure output from the orifice
plate to be entered
Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) at the upstream
tapping to be entered
Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Scale o/p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Ma Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
Gas Constant The relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
Z The compressibility factor described above.
This calculates the average value of the last R samples of a channel, taken at N second intervals, where R
and N can be defined by the user. At initiation, up to the time of the first sample reading, the displayed
value is the average of the channel sampled every iteration (i.e. at 8 Hz.).
The number of readings over which the average can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder. An instru-
ment alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3 for details.
MKT is defined as ‘the isothermal temperature that corresponds to the kinetic effects of time-tempera-
ture distribution’. The recorder calculates MKT, using the equation below:
−ΔH
Tk = R
−ΔH −ΔH −ΔH −ΔH
e RT 1max + e RT 1min + ... + e RTNmax + e RTNmax
ln
2N
where: Tk = The required mean kinetic temperature in Kelvins
ΔH = The heat of activation
R = The universal gas constant
T1max = The highest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
T1min = The lowest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmax = The highest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmin = The lowest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
N = The total number of measurement periods
As described in ‘Configurable items, below, this is simplified for the recorder user , to four entries viz:
The number of the channel measuring temperature, the number of samples to be used, the time between
the samples and the relevant ‘Heat of Activation’.
Note: The input temperature must be in Kelvins. This can be achieved either by setting the rel-
evant channel’s units to Kelvins, or by using a further maths channel to convert the measuring units
to Kelvins.
(K = ˚C + 273.15 or K = 0.555(˚F -32) + 273.15).
CONFIGURABLE ITEMS
Figure 4.3.11g shows the configurable items for the MKT function.
Notes
1 This function produces a ‘rolling’ result. I.E. when the final (Nth) sample has been taken, the
next sample (N + 1)th replaces Sample 1, the (N + 2th) sample replaces Sample 2, and so on.
2 During the first sample, the current minimum and maximum values of temperature are entered
into the equation at the recorder iteration rate (i.e. 8Hz).
3. The number of readings over which the value can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder.
An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3
for details.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
Flow t
QM t =
VLT + ΔVT ( 100
d
)
where, QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec. at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
∆VT = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
VLT and ∆V T are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user need only enter ‘values’ for
measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’ can be constants,
input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11h and accompanying parameter descriptions give full
details.
PARAMETERS
Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Use Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Pressure Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
plying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Table 4.3.11b, below, gives multipliers for converting some common pressure units
to MPa. More details may be found at websites http://www.ex.ac.uk/trol/scol/
ccpress.htm and http://www.onlineconversion.com/pressure.htm, amongst others.
Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
pour; 100 = no liquid.
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
There is a wide range of pressure measuring units in use throughout the world. The following table
gives a multiplication factor for converting some common units to MPa (MegaPascals), to four significant
figures. Further conversion factors can be found at the websites given on the previous page. (Where the
conversion is to Pascals, not to MegaPascals, the factors given have to be divided by 1,000,000.)
The table above shows multiplying factors to convert common pressure units to MPa. This conversion is
carried out as follows:
Example: A pressure transducer, connected to input channel 3 gives an output in the range 10 to 100 PSI.
The input to a steam equation in maths channel 1 requires the pressure units to be MPa. To convert, set
up a further maths channel (e.g. No. 2) as shown below, then use maths channel 2 as the source channel
for the pressure input to the steam equation.
The suggested scale low/high values are based on the resulting pressure range in MPa - i.e 0.06895 to
0.6895.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
Flow t
QE t = (
T ( 100 )
V + ΔV d LT 100)
h + ΔhT ( d )
LT
where, QEt = Heat energy flow (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
∆V T = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
hLT = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T ˚C
∆hT = hVT - hLT, where hVT is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T ˚C
VLT and ∆V T; hLT and ∆hT are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs only to
enter ‘values’ for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’
can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11j and accompanying parameter de-
scriptions give full details.
PARAMETERS
Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Use Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Pressure (note 3) Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
plying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
pour; 100 = no liquid.
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
3. See ‘Saturated Steam Mass Flow’ above for details of pressure unit conversion
Note: The following assumptions are made with regard to this implementation:
1. The condensate return is 100% wet saturated water. No flash steam component is included.
2. The same mass leaves the system as enters it.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
Flow t
QE t = (
h + ΔhT1( 100
d
) − hLT 2 )
T1( 100 )
d LT1
V
LT1 + ΔV
where, QEt = Heat energy consumed (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
VLT1 = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T1 ˚C
∆V T1 = V VT1 - VLT1, where V VT1 is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T1 ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
hLT1 = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T1 ˚C
∆hT1 = hVT1 - hLT1, where hVT1 is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T1 ˚C
hLT2 = Enthalpy of the condensate liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T2 ˚C
VLT1 and ∆V T1; hLT1, hLT2 and ∆hT1 are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs
only to enter ‘values’ for measured flow, either the temperature or the pressure of the steam and the tem-
perature of the condensate. These ‘values’ can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure
4.3.11l and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details.
Figure 4.3.11k is a simplified sketch of a typical installation, showing where flow rate, pressure and tem-
perature readings are taken.
Steam supply
Inlet
Inlet pressure
flow
or temperature
Heat Heat
exchanger exchanger
Process 1 Process 2
Condensate
temperature
Steam Steam
Trap Trap
Condensate
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
PARAMETERS
Inlet Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Use Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Inlet Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Inlet Pressure Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
plying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Inlet Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
pour; 100 = no liquid.
Return Temperature Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the condensate tempera-
ture If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for the constant to be
entered.
*Note: See Saturated Steam Mass Flow, above, for details of pressure unit conversion
GROUP MKT
Similar in operation to MKT, described above, except that the MKT is derived from a specified group of
points rather than a single point. For each sample period, the maximum and minimum values reached by
any point(s) within the specified group are saved, and used as inputs to the Equation.
*Note: For channels being read over Modbus, the ‘priority intervals’ set in the Modbus Master
configuration menu (section 4.3.16) may cause the readings to be inaccurate or to be continuously
zero. For this reason, a minimum sample period of 1 second is recommended.
Reset now
This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring
applications. The equation calculated is:
20.9%− Specified O 2
Correction = × Measured Gas
20.9%− Measured O 2
where,
Specified O2 = specified oxygen entered as a constant 5-digit value (prescribed for the particular proc-
ess).
Measured O2 = measured oxygen, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input) (See application
note, below).
Measured Gas = the measured gas, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input).
APPLICATION NOTE
Some Authorities allow Oxygen correction to be made ONLY if the Measured Oxygen value is above a
limit specified by such Authorities.
For the oxygen correction function to conform with this requirement it is necessary to ‘Filter’ the Meas-
ured Oxygen value using a High Select function, with ‘Measured Oxygen’ and the Specified Limit con-
stant as its inputs. The output from this function (derived channel number) is then used as the ‘Measured
oxygen’ value.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Value 0.0000 Units
Function O2 Correction
Measured O2 Channel 1
Measured Gas Channel 2
Specified O2 0 %
Units Units
Apply Discard
This determines the percentage relative humidity from wet and dry temperature and atmospheric pres-
sure inputs.
Standard temperature and pressure at sea level are defined as 1.01325 Bar, and 15˚C. Pressure varies
with height as indicated in table 4.3.11c. The standard psychrometric constant is 0.000666 (6.66 x 10 -4).
A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia.
At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe tem-
perature and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be
measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a
suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for air).
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple. The tem-
perature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for successful operation, the probe temperature must
be greater than 973K (700˚C).
Figure 4.3.11r shows the configuration menu. Figure 4.3.11s shows oxygen concentration versus probe
emf for various temperatures.
The channel which is measuring the probe output would normally need to be set to: Input Type = mV;
Input low = 0; input high = 100..
A typical temperature-measuring channel might be set up as:
Input Type = Thermocouple; Lin type = Type K; Range low = 273; Range high = 1800, Range units = K.
The maths channel scaling would typically be configured as:
Units = %; Scale Low = 0; Scale High = 5 (for boiler flues) or 10 (for kilns).
100 1
8
6
10 1
8
6
2
Percent Oxygen
1 1
8
6
15
00
14 ˚C
00
˚C 2
13
00
12
˚C
00
11
˚C
00
10
˚C
1
00
0.1
˚C
90
0˚
8
80
C
0˚C
70
0˚C
6
60
0˚C
500
400
˚C
4
300
˚C
˚C
0.01 1
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
OXYGEN POTENTIAL
The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measurement of its ability to oxidise or reduce. For any ele-
ment, a value of oxygen potential (free energy of formation) is known. Above this value, the material will
oxidise, below it, no oxidisation will occur. Figure 4.3.11t, below, is a free energy diagram for a number of
oxidising processes.
Op = 0.00457 × T × logO p′
Where: Op = Required oxygen potential (in kilocalories)
T = Probe temperature (in Kelvins)
Opʹ = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (in atmospheres)
It can be shown that, because the oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to
1450 kelvins, the zirconia probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere, accord-
ing to:
E = (10.84 × T) + 40 mV (in the range 870 to 1450 K)
Thus, it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe, using a standard input
channel of the instrument, scaled in units of oxygen potential. A typical configuration might be:
Input Type = mV;
Input low = 40;
Input high = 1124;
Scale low = -100;
Scale high = 0;
Units = kCal.
Such a configuration would be suitable over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K (600 to 1200 ˚C).
Air O3
6F
e2 100
M
2
+O 200
uO O4
2C e3
O2 4F m 6FeO + O2 2Fe3O4 300
u+
2C M
M 2N
iO 400
O i+
O2 M
2Cu 2 2N m 500
-50 + O2
4Cu 2CO 2
T 600
+ O2 O
2CO 2H 2
S2 + 2O 2 2SO 2 Sn
O2
2H 2
+ O2 700
O2
2 CoO S n+ 800
+ O2 2FeO
2Co + O2 900
2Fe M
Oxygen potential (kilocalories)
C + O2 CO2
T 1000
-100 2C m 2T a 2
O5
1100
+O
2 O2
+5
b 2 Zn
O 4Ta 1200
milliVolts
O2
M Zn
+ 1300
2
M m
M r O3
2C 2
T T 1400
O2 O M t m
r +3 2Mn 1500
4C + O2
2Mn
-150 1600
O3
2V 2
O2 1700
+3
4V
SiO 2 M 1800
t Si +
O2
1900
T l O3
TiO 2 2A 2
O2 2000
Ti + 3O 2
l+
4A M 2100
-200
T M 2200
B
M eO
2300
gO 2B
2M O2 2400
T 2B
e+
ZrO 2 O2 Th
O2
g+
+ O2 2M T + O2
2500
Zr Th
2600
-250 2700
2800
2900
The following description assumes a group name of ‘Furnace 1’, which contains four channels with de-
scriptors ‘Temp 1’, ‘Temp 2’, ‘Temp 3’ and ‘Temp 4’
The output of the Group Minimum function is the current lowest value of any of the points in the source
group. The required source group is selected by picklist.
Should a point return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function
is the minimum of the remaining points.
DESCRIPTORS
As a part of the Group Minimum function configuration, it is possible to select one of two types of de-
scriptor: ‘User Defined’ and ‘Minimum Channel’. Figure 4.3.11u, below shows the relevant area of the
configuration page.
where ‘Units’ is the text entered in the Group Minimum maths channel configuration, not that for the input
channel, although typically, they would be the same.
Note: The Group configuration checkboxes for maths channels with ’Minimum Channel Descrip-
tor’ selected, are ‘greyed’ thus preventing such channels from being used as inputs to their own
source group. See section 4.3.2 for Group configuration details.
Thermocouple Select any real or virtual channel, or ‘Constant’ as the source channel.
Serial number Enter an identifier for the thermocouple.
Inst calibration points Enter the number of Instrument calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
Inst cal temp n The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘Inst calibration points’ value.
Inst cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point.
T/C calibration points Enter the number of Thermocouple calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
T/C cal temp n The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘T/C calibration points’ value.
T/C cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point.
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
This table show addresses for maths channel 1 run-time data. Generally: channel N address = channel 1
address + 3(N-1) (decimal)
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A2BA (41658) 1
Ch1 status Channel status Enum Read only A2BB (41659) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A2BC (41660) 1
Bit 0:0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
The following table shows addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only DF73 (57203) 2
Ch1 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only DF75 (57205) 2
Ch1 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only DF77 (57207) 2
Ch1 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only DF79 (57209) 2
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7B (57211) 2
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7D (57213) 2
Ch 1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7F (57215) 2
Ch 1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note) Float Read/Write DF81 (57217) 2
Spare DF83 (57219) 20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
4.3.12 Totalisers
INTRODUCTION
Each totaliser allows the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any maths channel.
Using the maths functions, it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels, so the value of two
channels added together, or the difference between two channels could be totalised if required. The
totaliser equation is :
ma t
tot t = tot t−1 +
PSF × USF
where tot t = totaliser value this sample*
tot t-1 = totaliser value last sample*
mat = value of totalised channel this sample*
PSF = Period Scaling Factor (See Period scaler description below)
USF = Units Scaling Factor (See Unit scaler description below)
CONFIGURATION
Preset now
Period scaler 1
Unit scaler 1
Descriptor Totaliser 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0 Units (totaliser)
Scale High 1 Units (totaliser)
Zone Low 1 %
Zone High 100 %
Scale Type None Select None, Linear or Log
PV format Numeric Select Numeric or Scientific
Max Decimal Digits 4
Colour 0
Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number
Select: Off,
Enable Off Unlatched,
Latched,
Job Number 1 Select Job number Trigger
Apply Discard
Note: Selecting ‘High’ compression in Archive configuration may cause very high totaliser values
to be displayed incorrectly by the recorder and held incorrectly in the history file. This problem
may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by re-scal-
ing the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
TOTALISER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 6F39 (28473) 1
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 6F3A (28474) 1
Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 6F3B (28475) 1
Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 6F3C (28476) 1
PV type Input type Enum Read only 6F3D (28477) 1
1 = Analogue input 3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths 4 = Counter
Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 6F3E (28478) 1
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) Enum Read only 6F3F (28479) 1
(See Annex B for RGB definitions)
Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 6F40 (28480) 3
Spare 6F43 (28483) 2
Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 6F45 (28485) 4
Spare 6F49 (28489) 4
Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 6F4D (28493) 4
Spare 6F51 (28497) 4
Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 6F55 (28501) 10
Spare 6F5F (28511) 10
No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 6F69 (28521) 1
PV format Enum Read only 6F6A (28522) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 6F6B (28523) 60
Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 6FA7 (28583) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched 3 = Trigger
Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 6FA8 (28584) 1
0 = Absolute low 1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in 3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise 5 = Rate of change fall
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FA9 (28585) 1
Spare 6FAA (28586) 10
Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FB4 (28596) 1
Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FB5 (28597) 1
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FB6 (28598) 1
Spare 6FB7 (28599) 10
Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FC1 (28609) 1
Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FC2 (28610) 1
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FC3 (28611) 1
Spare 6FC4 (28612) 10
Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FCE (28622) 1
Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FCF (28623) 1
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FD0 (28624) 1
Spare 6FD1 (28625) 10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
This table shows addresses for totaliser 1. Generally: totaliser N address = totaliser 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
TOTALISER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A3E6 (41958) 1
Status Channel status Enum Read only A3E7 (41959) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A3E8 (41960) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Totaliser 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only ED83 (60803) 2
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only ED85 (60805) 2
Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only ED87 (60807) 2
Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only ED89 (60809) 2
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8B (60811) 2
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8D (60813) 2
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8F (60815) 2
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note) Float Read/Write ED91 (60817) 2
Spare ED93 (60819) 20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for totaliser 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Totaliser 1 value Current process value (PV) Float Read/Write FB7F (64383) 2
Totaliser 1 status Channel status Enum Read only FB81 (64385) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Totaliser 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - FB82 (64386) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
4.3.13 Counters
INTRODUCTION
The virtual channels option introduces a user-configurable number of counters, which can be preset, disa-
bled, incremented or decremented by Job action. If access is permitted, the user can preset the counter to
a selected value, as and when required, from the configuration page. See section 4.7 for Job details and sec-
tion 4.3.22 for a description of virtual channels. If the Batch option is fitted (section 4.3.10), then batches can
be started whenever counter 1 changes value, and if this is done, the current value of counter 1 is appended
to batch field 1. (Other counters can be selected for Batch initiation, but operation is not guaranteed.)
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.13 shows a typical (enabled) counter configuration page. The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Preset now
Descriptor Counter 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0 Units
Scale High 1 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Scale Type None Select None or Linear
Colour 0
Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number
Select: Off,
Enable Off Unlatched,
Latched,
Job Number 1 Select Job number Trigger
Apply Discard
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Counter number Allows any of the available counters to be selected for configuration
Enable Allows the user to start/stop counting by enabling/disabling the counter.
Value Shows the current dynamic value of the counter
Units Allows a text string of up to 5 characters to be entered as a units description
Preset Allows a counter value to be entered for manual or job action preset.
Scale low/high The values to appear at the scale end points. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during
normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section
4.7.
The remaining configuration items are as described for input channels in section 4.3.3, except that Log/
Linear scales are not available.
Note: An absolute high alarm (for example) with a threshold of 10, will not be triggered until the value
exceeds 10 (i.e. counter value = 11). In order to trip the alarm at 10, a threshold lower than 10 must be
entered (e.g. threshold = 9.5). A similar situation exists for absolute low and deviation alarms.
COUNTER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 8EDD (36573) 1
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 8EDE (36574) 1
Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 8EDF (36575) 1
Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 8EE0 (36576) 1
PV type Input type Enum Read only 8EE1 (36577) 1
1 = Analogue input 3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths 4 = Counter
Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 8EE2 (36578) 1
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 8EE3 (36579) 1
Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 8EE4 (36580) 3
Spare 8EE7 (36583) 2
Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 8EE9 (36585) 4
Spare 8EED (36589) 4
Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 8EF1(36593) 4
Spare 8EF5 (36597) 4
Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 8EF9 (36601) 10
Spare 8F03 (36611) 10
No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 8F0D (36621) 1
PV format Enum Read only 8F0E (36622) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 8F0F (36623) 60
Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 8F4B (36683) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched 3 = Trigger
Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 8F4C (36684) 1
0 = Absolute low 1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in 3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise 5 = Rate of change fall
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F4D (36685) 1
Spare 8F4E (36686) 10
Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 8F58 (36696) 1
Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 8F59 (36697) 1
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F5A (36698) 1
Spare 8F5B (36699) 10
Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 8F65 (36709) 1
Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 8F66 (36710) 1
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F67 (36711) 1
Spare 8F68 (36712) 10
Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 8F72 (36722) 1
Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 8F73 (36723) 1
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F74 (36724) 1
Spare 8F75 (36725) 10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
This table shows addresses for counter 1. Generally: Counter N address = counter 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
COUNTER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A47C (42108) 1
Status Channel status Enum Read only A47D (42109) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A47E (42110) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Counter 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only F48B (62603) 2
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only F48D (62605) 2
Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only F48F (62607) 2
Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only F491 (62609) 2
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write F493 (62611) 2
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note) Float Read/Write F495 (62613) 2
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note) Float Read/Write F497 (62615) 2
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note) Float Read/Write F499 (62617) 2
Spare F49B (62619) 20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for counter 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Counter 1 value Current process value (PV) Float Read/Write FC47 (64583) 2
Counter 1 status Channel status Enum Read only FC49 (64585) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Counter 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - FC4A (64586) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
4.3.14 Timers
INTRODUCTION
This feature supplies 12 count-down timers which can be used for general timing purposes. The timers
can be either one-shot or repeating, and can be initiated in the following ways:
1. directly by the operator from the configuration page (if access permission is granted),
2. by job action (see section 4.7),
3. at a predefined time/date,
4. every ‘time period’, where the ‘time period’ can be configured to be anything from 1 second to 1
year. For example, setting seconds to ‘30’ and leaving all other fields ‘Any’, the timer will start every
minute on the half minute. Setting seconds to ‘30’ and minutes to ‘0’ will cause the timer to start at 30
seconds past each hour.
Note: Times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving changes. Thus if the timer is set to trigger on a
daily, weekly, etc, basis, then, during ‘Summer Time’, the trigger will occur an hour late (i.e. at 01:00
hrs. instead of at midnight).
The full range of jobs is described in section 4.7. ‘Timer Active’ is defined as an internal event trigger
(section 4.3.6).
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.14 shows a typical timer configuration display. The page is accessed from the Root menu/Op-
erator/Config menu.
Start now
Descriptor Timer 1
Self start
Date Any
Month Any These fields appear
Hour Midnight only if 'Self start' is
enabled.
Minute Any
Second Any
Duration 60 Seconds
Repeat after 0 Seconds
Job Number 1 Select Job number
Select Job
Category No Action category
Apply Discard
SELF-START EXAMPLE
To preset Totaliser number 1 to zero, daily, at midnight:
4.3.15 Connections
INTRODUCTION
ASCII (INPUT)
Note: See Section 12 for details of the ASCII Printer Output option.
This mode allows the recorder to receive simple ASCII messages from, for example, barcode readers,
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Global Positioning Systems (GPSs) (NMEA-0183 protocol) etc.
Messages are sent to as many groups as are set up to receive them, and become a part of these groups’
histories, and appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays in the following format:
MODBUS RTU
This allows the recorder’s serial communications ‘port’ to be used as Modbus master or Modbus slave.
When acting as a master, the unit can communicate with up to 16 slaves. Use of the Serial port is comple-
mentary to the use of Ethernet connections.
Note: When configuring a unit as a Modbus slave, it is recommended that the Instrument and
Point Configurations give easily identifiable instrument and point names (descriptors).
INSTALLATION
If the option is fitted, two 9-way D-type connectors (plugs) are fitted at the rear of the recorder, as shown
in section 2.2.
If the communications line is left open-ended, the end of the cable acts as a reflector, returning what
can appear to be ‘true’ data signals back down the line. A receiver cannot distinguish between ‘true’ and
reflected data, with the result that the ‘true’ data is corrupted.
In order to avoid this, a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument. If the value of
this resistor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable (e.g. 120 Ohms), then the line appears
to be of infinite length and no reflections occur. Such a value however, does not always give the best
signal-to-noise ratio, so a compromise value (e.g. 220 Ohms) is normally selected to give the optimum
performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the signal-to-noise ratio. The recorder
communications port is terminated as shown in figure 4.3.15a, below, for a single point-to-point applica-
tion.
5 Volts
100kΩ
RxB
TxB
Transmit lines Receiver
220Ω
from sender device
TxA
RxA
100kΩ
0 Volts
Recorder
Figure 4.3.15a Recorder termination (single-drop EIA485 application)
Group 5
Group 6
Apply Discard
Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate. Parity None Select None, Odd or Even
Allows the user to select the port to be used for serial communications.
A Link error count is provided for every slave. The count is incremented every time there is a framing
error, a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error. The ‘Reset Error Count’ key is used to reset
the count to zero.
PROTOCOL
For the Serial communications board option, ASCII (input), Modbus Slave, Modbus Master or ASCII
Printer protocols are available.
CONNECTION
BAUD RATE
Allows a Baud rate to be chosen from a picklist of: 300, 600, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400. This value
must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2. This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. This value must be the same for all de-
vices in the serial link.
DATA BITS
For ASCII (input) protocol only, selectable as 7 or 8. This value must be the same for all devices in the se-
rial link.
TIMEOUT
For ASCII (input) protocol, this allows a timeout value to be entered of between 50 and 3000 msec inclu-
sive. A value of 0 = no timeout. See also ‘Messaging Information’ below.
For Modbus Master protocol, this allows a timeout to be entered of between 100 and 9,999 msec (inclu-
sive), An error code B is generated (if so configured - see ‘Enable Error Code B’ below). If the master has
not received a reply to a request within the timeout period. For slaves configured with their own timeout
periods, these will override the entry here.
For ASCII (input) protocol only, the message can be prefixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters and can be
suffixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters. The First and Second Start and End characters are entered as
decimal ASCII codes between 0 and 127 as required. 0 = no character, 10 = Line Feed; 13 = Carriage
Return. See Annex B for a list of ASCII codes. If only one start or end character is required, the first char-
acter must be entered, and the second character be entered as zero.
GROUP SELECTION
For ASCII input protocol, this allows groups to be deselected/selected for receipt of the messages. A
checked box indicates that the associated group will receive the messages.
If enabled, this causes an error code B to be generated in the event of a timeout or a Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) error.
If disabled, this prevents ‘external’ (Ethernet) masters from accessing the slaves connected to this instru-
ment. (I.E. only this instrument can act as a master to its slaves.)
MESSAGING INFORMATION
Characters are read into a buffer, until the end of message characters are received, or until the time-
since-last-character exceeds the entered Timeout value. Date, Time and ‘(Serial)’ are then prefixed to the
message, which is then sent to the selected groups. The date and time relate to when the first buffered
character was received. If Start-of-message characters are configured, characters will be read into the
buffer only after these characters have been received.
The buffer holds up to 120 characters plus date/time etc. and start/end-of-message characters . Further
characters are discarded until End-of-message is received, or timeout occurs.
Message characters below Hex 20 (decimal 32) will be replaced by question marks (?).
MESSAGING RULES
1 If no start-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message starts after the timeout period has elapsed.
2 If no end-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message ends after the timeout period has elapsed.
3 If start-of-message characters are configured, and a timeout value other than 0 has been entered, all
characters prior to the Start-of-message characters are ignored.
4 If start-of-message characters are configured but neither end characters nor timeout have been con-
figured, then this is an invalid configuration.
Should this configuration be a requirement, if the same characters are entered as end-of-message
characters instead, then each message will be sent to the groups when the next message is received.
5 If no start or end-of-message characters are entered and no timeout value is entered, all received
characters are discarded
6 If a received message is deemed to be corrupt, it is discarded and the software will await a further
message.
7 Start and End-of-message characters are removed before the messages are sent to the groups.
MODBUS ADDRESS
When acting as a slave, the recorder will respond both to the address set in Instrument Configuration
(section 4.3.1) and to address 255 (used by some network scanning software).
Master Configuration consists of entering a Modbus Address, and, for Ethernet connection, an IP ad-
dress or DNS path name for each of the available remote devices which are to be used as slaves. The
configuration also allows three different priority intervals to be entered, and read/write parameters can
be configured to be accessed at one of these three rates.
The unit comes complete with a number of ‘Profiles’ for known instruments. This allows it to ‘recognise’
an instrument as a slave type, and simplifies the read/write process for ‘known’ instruments, by present-
ing commonly used Parameters by name. Other parameters can be accessed by entering the relevant
register’s address. The unit will also communicate with ‘third party’ instruments, but in such a case, the
user has to define the required read/write register addresses derived from data supplied by the manu-
facturer of the instrument.
Once the remote unit has been recognised by the master, the master and slave units can be configured
to carry out the following:
1. By setting a master input channel to: Type = ‘Master Comms’, selected parameters can be read by
the master from a selected slave. This master channel can then be included in display groups, can
have alarm setpoints, run jobs etc., independently of the original channel. In a similar way, maths
functions can be read by setting a master Maths channel to: Function = ‘Master Comms’.
2. The ‘Demand Write’ feature can write values to a selected parameter in a selected slave, as a one-
shot update. Demand Writes can be initiated by operator action, or they can be initiated by job ac-
tion or (if the User Screens option is fitted), by Operator Key action.
3. For slaves whose input and/or maths channels can be set to ‘Modbus Comms Input’, the master’s
‘Output channels’ feature can copy master input or maths channels to a selected slave, as a continu-
ous process.
Notes
1. If reading from or writing to more than one instrument, it is recommended that some thought
be given to instrument and point descriptors, as confusion can easily arise. This is particularly
true if Bridge is connected to a master which has several slaves attached.
2. If ‘Link error’ occurs whilst connected to a Modbus slave, the slave’s delay parameter (if any)
should be enabled. If no such parameter is available, the slave’s manufacturer should be con-
tacted for advice.
An example configuration is given later in this section showing how to set up a master unit to read inputs
from two slaves, and to re-write one of these channels to a third slave.
Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure below shows all possible fields, even though some
are actually mutually exclusive (e.g. ‘Login Required’ does not appear for ‘Profile = Third party’).
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Priority intervals This allows three levels of update rate to be entered. These rates are used in point
configuration, to define how often a value is read. In order to optimise the perform-
ance of the serial link, it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with re-
quirements be selected. The interval is entered in multiples of 1/8th second (0.125
seconds).
In some cases, two update rates can be defined. For example, when reading a Proc-
ess Value (PV) channel from a slave, it is possible to set the reading frequency of the
PV to the highest rate available, but other, less frequently changing, values (scale
low/high for example) can be read at a slower rate.
Store Diagnostics If enabled, diagnostics information is kept in non-volatile memory, and is thus re-
tained during power cycling.
Slave A picklist of slaves, initially called ‘Remote Device N’. When the device is detected,
this name changes to the detected Instrument’s Descriptor (if any) or a default tag.
The slave name can be edited in the ‘Descriptor’ entry field below.
Network Ethernet
Timeout 500
For 50 Node(s)
Modbus Address 1
To 2
The ‘Detect All Slaves’ key is used to detect any slaves connected to the system, within certain search
parameters.
Operation of the button calls a display page (figure 4.3.16b) which allows the entry of a start IP address,
a range of IP addresses, and a range of Modbus addresses. In the above example, the search is carried
out for all devices with Modbus addresses in the range 1 to 2 inclusive, associated with instruments which
have IP addresses between 149.121.130.200 and 149.121.130.249 inclusive.
The ‘Autodetect’ page displays the progress of the search. Once the search is complete, the results are
displayed as shown in figure 4.3.16c, below. For example, the top two lines show that devices with Mod-
bus addresses 1 and 2 were detected at IP address 149.121.130.211.
For instrument types similar to those described in this manual, the Instrument Descriptor is displayed in
the list. For other instruments, if the type is recognised, then the instrument type ID (e.g. model number)
appears. As can be seen from the figure, the instrument descriptors for the first two detected instru-
ments have been edited (section 4.3.1); the second two have the default descriptor (Instrument), and the
final one is a model 2747.
Note: The model number ‘2747’ is used for illustrative purposes only. If such an instrument type
exists, it should not be assumed from the above that it will be recognised by the auto detect sys-
tem.
Instrument at 149.121.130.236/1
2747 at 149.121.130.237/1
As can be seen from the figure above, each instrument has a tick box associated with it. The user enables
those instruments which are to be included in the Slave List, by touching the relevant boxes. Operation
of ‘Apply’ then causes the selected instruments to be incorporated into the Slave list in the Modbus Mas-
ter configuration page.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is enabled, existing slaves are overwritten starting with slave 1 in the list.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is not enabled, then new slaves selected from the Auto detect page will be
inserted into the free slots in the slave list.
Note: A ‘free slot’ is either an empty slot, or a slot containing a slave which has not yet been ena-
bled.
A socket is the name given to a logical connection between two Ethernet nodes. The establishment and
maintenance of sockets is controlled by the recorder, and the user has no control other than to enable
or disable the ‘Share sockets’ facility. The share socket feature is available only for slaves configured as
Ethernet devices (i.e. Network = Ethernet).
The upper illustration in figure 4.3.16d, shows master 1 communicating with slaves 1 to n via an Ethernet-
to-Serial converter, called a Modbus Gateway. In such a case, it is more efficient to allow all the slaves to
communicate over one link between master 1 and master 2, than to establish individual links between
master 1 and each of the slaves. In this example, ‘Share sockets’ should be enabled.
The lower illustration show a similar situation, except that master 2 is not just a gateway, but is a meas-
uring device in its own right. In such a case, Socket 1 is used for high speed communications between
master 1 and master 2, and Socket 2 is used to link master 1 to the slaves individually. In this case ‘Share
Sockets’ should be disabled for master 2, and enabled for all other devices.
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
Socket 1
Master 2 Serial link (RS485)
Master 1 Ethernet (Instrument)
Socket 2
Note: For completeness, figures 4.3.16e, 4.3.16f and 4,3,16g show all possible configuration fields.
The fields that actually appear are slave-model, and parameter dependent.
The following parameters may be accessible from a recorder or data acquisition unit, depending on
model number. Figure 4.3.16e, above, refers
Notes:
1. Items such as Scale, Zone and descriptor may be editable (white background) or not (grey back-
ground), depending on model.
2 This description includes only those items which are unique to input channels with Input Type =
Master Comms. For other items please see section 4.3.3.
Channel Number Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured. As soon as
Modbus master is selected as input type, the display changes from ‘Channel 1’ (for
example) to ‘Read 1’. This legend stays as ‘Read 1’ ‘until a descriptor is entered (be-
low), which immediately overwrites it.
Slave Allows the user to select (from a picklist), the slave from which data is to be retrieved.
The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master
Comms Configuration described above.
Digital Allows data to be read into a digital input.
Parameter Allows the user to select Alarm setpoints, Process Value, Batch status (model de-
pendent) or ‘User defined’ to be selected. ‘User defined’ allows a (decimal) register
address to be entered
Scaling For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter. If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a propor-
tion of 64k.
Point type This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point type
allows the relevant point type (i.e. input channel, maths channel, totaliser etc.) in the
slave to be selected.
Point number This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point
number allows the relevant point number in the slave to be selected.
Group Number This item appears for Parameter = ‘Batch Status’ only. Group number allows that
group, the status of which is to be read, to be defined.
Process Value Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value. The three rates
(Low, Medium and High) have the values set in the Master Comms configuration.
Span Where the input value is scaled (see above), this ‘Span’ setting sets the Zero and Full
Scale values for the channel. This is different from the situation obtaining in input
channels, where span and scale have different meanings.
Note: Figure 4.3.16f is a typical page and may show more or fewer items than appear on the actual
screen for a particular controller
Alarm status
Auto/Manual
Process value
Read alarm active status
Read alarm unacknowledged status
Working output power
Working setpoint
Table 4.3.16a Typical Controller read parameters
As previously mentioned, ‘User Defined’ can be selected for all slaves and for some slave types it is the
only way of accessing some or all parameters.
The number of the register holding the required parameter is to be found in the user documentation sup-
plied with the slave. For instance, if the unit to which this manual refers, were to be a slave, then the list
of registers is to be found in section 8. For example, for this instrument, to determine what type of alarm,
alarm 1 on channel 2 is, register 396 would be used, and the expected value would be 0 for Absolute
low, 1 for absolute high, 2 for Deviation in, 3 for Deviation out, 4 for Rate-of-change high or 5 for Rate-of-
Change low.
This section defines those parameters which are unique to user defined registers.
Value Shows the value returned from the selected register, as modified by the scaling fac-
tor (if any).
Function Code Allows Modbus function code 03 or 04 to be selected. In some implementations,
the functions of the two codes are identical. In others, the codes have different func-
tions. See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus
codes. For this instrument see section 8.2.1.
Register A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documenta-
tion supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave docu-
mentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
Scaling Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent. If scaling is re-
quired, the choice may be ‘Decimal Places, or High/Low, again according to Model.
Decimal Places
Allows a dividing factor to be entered. An entry of 1, divides the returned value by
10. An entry of 2, divides by 100 etc. for successful implementation, there must be
a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the ‘Max Decimal Digits’ configura-
tion field for the value to be displayed with the required precision. ‘None’ leaves the
returned value unchanged.
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter.
If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65,535.
OPEN/CLOSED STRINGS
The text strings for the open and closed statuses of a digital input channel can be read by ‘Enabling’ the
Digital checkbox for the relevant slave and Channel number. The strings returned will be those entered
in the slave channel’s configuration.
The default values are representations of an open switch (for Open) and a closed switch (for Closed). Fig-
ure 4.3.16h shows these two states.
Open String
Closed String
STATUS BITS
This allows the user to view the value of a bit in a status word such as Instrument Status, Channels in
Group etc. The relevant Register is accessed by entering its decimal number into the Register field which
appears when ‘User Defined’ is selected as Parameter.
Example
Figure 4.3.16i, below shows a master channel configuration page which causes a message* to be sent to
allgroups if the memory device inserted in a slave recorder is full. Open / closed strings are also entered
as Disk OK and DiskFull respectively, so that if this channel is included in a group, then whichever of these
legends is appropriate will be displayed in the channel faceplate.
* Note: The message string is entered as a part of Message Configuration as described in section
4.3.8.
From the recorder’s documentation, Instrument Status is held at register number 22. As can be seen
from table 4.3.16b, disk full status is reported by bit 4.
This example describes a recorder (Furn1 Master) acting as a master to two other recorders (Furn1
Record and Furn2 Record) and a controller (Furn1 Control). This example shows only the configuration
pages necessary to set up the master input/output channels and the slave Comms channel. It is assumed
that:
a. the master comms configuration has been completed with Remote devices 1, 2 and 3 set up as Furn1
Control, Furn1 Record and Furn2 control, respectively.
b. all recorders are of the type described in this manual. Other types of slave may need more inputs, or
different inputs to be entered.
to:
Controller 1
(Slave 1)
Furn1 Control
Master channel 1 setup, to read the Loop1 PV from ‘Furn1 Control’ into channel 1, is shown in figure
4.3.16k, below. Note that, for this example that a Span High of 100 and Descriptor ‘Furn1 PV1’ have been
entered. The span zero and span high values should match those of the PV being read.
Master channel 2 setup, to read the Channel 1 PV from ‘Furn1 record into channel 2’, is shown in figure
4.3.16l, below.
This shows the setup required in order to output the master’s channel 2 (Furn1 Temp1) to Furn2 Record
channel 1. The Descriptor Furn1 Temp1 has been entered as the Output Name. This happens to be the
same as the channel descriptor, but could be any required text string.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16n shows how to set up a slave channel to read an input from a master. Note that the scaling
of this channel must match the scaling of the source channel.
The Total requests and Bad requests totals both exclude retries. The numbers in parentheses are excep-
tion code numbers as described in table 8.2.1b.
The Initiate Comms Test is a loop-back test that sends a message to the selected slave and waits for it to
be returned. If the test is successful, the ‘Successful Comms Test’ is incremented. If not successful, one
(or more) of the error box values is incremented.
Clock
Locale
Slave 1) Furn recorder 1 Upgrade
Actual High Priority 2 Seconds
Input Adjust
Actual Medium Priority 1 Seconds
Actual Low Priority 0.125 Seconds Output Adjust
Modbus Address 1
Master Comms Diagnostics
Slave Status Online
Last Transaction Status OK Ethernet diagnosticcs
Total Requests 1308
Bad requests 10
Good requests 1298
Illegal function codes (01) 0
Illegal addresses (02) 0
Illegal Values (03) 0
Slave Failures (04) 0
No Gateway path (10) 0
Gateway Target Fail (11) 0
Timed out requests 10
Master Rejects 0
Retried requests 4
Serial Link Error Count 0
Successful Comms Tests 1
Reset Diagnostics
MASTER COMMS
For Master Comms, this feature allows a Master Unit to write one (or more) of its points to one (or more)
slaves’ channels. Figure 4.3.17a shows a typical configuration page.
Apply Discard
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Output Channel Number
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type Select Master Comms
Slave Select the slave to be written-to.
Parameter Select required parameter from picklist (varies according to slave type/model)
Scaling If this field appears (depends on slave type), the Low and High scaling should match
that of the slave Channel being written to.
Point Type Allows a point type to be chosen from a picklist. (Picklist items vary according to
slave type/model)
Point Number For recorders, allows a point number to be entered. This point must be configured
as ‘Comms’ or ‘Slave Comms’ etc. (depending on slave type or model) at the slave.
Loop Number For Controllers, allows a loop number to be selected from a picklist.
Process Value Allows the selection of High, Medium or Low priority interval, as defined in the Mas-
ter Comms configuration page in section 4.3.16.
Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Source This allows the user to select the source point to be written to the slave destination
point.
Default This is the value written, if the source is in ‘Error’, and the ‘On error Write Default’
item (below) has been enabled.
On Error Write Default
If this item is enabled, the default value is written instead of the selected Source, if
the Source is in ‘Error’.
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Output Channel Number
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type Select V or mA
Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Range Low The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span low’.
Range High The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span high’.
Offset Allows a fixed value to be entered to the value of the source signal before conversion
to the output range.
Source span low Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range Low’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Source span high Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range High’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Data Source This allows the user to select a point, or a constant to act as the source. If ‘Constant’
is selected, a further field (not shown in figure 4.3.17b) appears allowing the constant
value to be entered.
On Error Drive Off: the output signal is switched off (0 Volts or 0 mA).
Drive High: the output signal is set to Range High + 15%.
Drive Low: the output signal is set to Range Low - 15%.
Figure 4.3.18a shows a typical configuration page for writing to a recorder. Figure 4.3.18b shows the Edit
Constant page. Figure 4.3.18c shows a configuration page for the case where the destination is defined
as a register location.
Figure 4.3.18a shows the configuration page for writing a value from the master unit to a ‘known’ slave
unit.
Enable
Select 'Master
Demand Type Master Comms Comms' or 'Off'
Status OK
Demand Write
Select destination
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder slave
Select parameter
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 to be written-to
Point Type Channel Select destination
Point Number 1
Descriptor Write 1
Source Constant
Default 0 Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
Allow Constant Edits to write (if Source = 'constant')
If enabled, the default value is written, should
On Error Write Default the selected source be in an 'Error' state.
Disable Retries If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Apply Discard
When operated, this pushbutton causes the Write to be initiated. If the source is ‘Constant’ and the ‘Al-
low Constant Edits’ item is enabled, an ‘Edit’ page appears (figure 4.3.18b) allowing the user to change
the constant value from its default value, before the Write is carried out. Otherwise, the Write is carried
out without any further action being required.
Write 1
Status OK
Constant 0
Write now
Close
Enable
Select 'Master
Demand Type Master Comms Comms' or 'Off'
Status Idle
Demand Write
Select destination
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder slave
Parameter User Defined
Function Code Preset Multiple reg (16)
Register 248
Data Type Float (32 Bit)
Descriptor Write 1
Source Constant
Default 0 Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
Allow Constant Edits to write (if Source = 'constant')
Disable Retries If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Apply Discard
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
This contains details of parameters unique to Demand Writes to specific registers. Other parameters are
as described above.
Function Code Allows the Modbus function code 6 or 16 to be selected. See the documentation
supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes (for this instrument see
section 8.2.1). Demand writes of a single 8 or 16-bit register can use either code, but
code 6 is more efficient. Writing two or more registers requires the use of code 16.
Register A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documenta-
tion supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave docu-
mentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
With Demand Writes, the recorder has no way of determining what the value, of the parameter being
written to, was prior to the Write. For this reason no ‘was’ value is included in the message. A typical
Demand Write audit trail message would be:
4.3.19 E-mails
E-mails can be sent by the instrument to one or more recipients. The user can enter 10 recipient e-mail
addresses in each of five mailing lists, giving a maximum of 50 addresses, 10 of which can be sent to at
any one time. A Recipient can appear in as many lists as required.
Up to 24 e-mails can be configured, but which of these e-mails is sent, is defined during Job or Event But-
ton configuration. Any function capable of triggering a job, can cause any of the available e-mails to be
sent.
As well as a ‘Subject’, and the body text, each e-mail can include one of the messages set up in ‘Message
Configuration’, and can thus include embedded values, alarm status, batch status etc., as described in
section 4.3.8.
E-MAIL CONFIGURATION
The figure below shows the e-mail configuration page (using fictitious names for email server/address
information).
Text
Include Message
Message 3) {1},{2},{3},{4} Select Message Number
Apply Discard
'Subject' entry
'Text' entry
(body text)
Body
Message
(if 'Include message' checked)
The figure above shows that the e-mail is in two distinct parts, the header (grey area) and the body (white
area).
The header contains details of the sender, the recipient(s), the subject and the time and date.
Note: The time and date may be local to the generating instrument, or local to the recipient, de-
pending on the recipient’s mail host configuration
The header is important in the prevention of ‘spamming’. The instrument adheres to the RFC2822 stand-
ard with respect to e-mail headers. Some servers are stricter than others, and it is not guaranteed that an
e-mail generated by the instrument will not be interpreted as a spam message by the receiving server.
From: This contains either the ‘Local Host’ name (as defined in Network/Name Setup) and
mailserver address, or the IP address if a fixed IP address is selected in Network/Ad-
dress settings. See section 4.5 for details of the Network key.
To: The first valid recipient address in the selected list.
CC: The remaining valid addresses in the recipient list
Subject: Contains the subject text entered during configuration. Empty if ‘SMS Body’ select-
ed as Protocol
This contains the body text, along with any appended messages. In the example above the message has
the embedded values of Instrument name, Instrument number, channel 1 alarm 1 status, as implied by
the body text.
OPERATION
1. E-mails are generated either by job or by operation of an Event Button from a User screen (if the
Screen builder option is fitted).
2. Every time the sending of an e-mail is requested, a ‘General’ note is generated and appears in the
message log for all groups. The format is: Date, Time Sent <e-mail descriptor> to List N, where <e-
mail descriptor> represents the descriptor entered in the configuration page for the e-mail, and ‘List
N’ is the recipient list to whom the e-mail was sent.
3. Access to e-mails is restricted to users with ‘Full Configuration’ permission.
4. Signing/Authorizing restrictions can be applied only to e-mails generated by Event button opera-
tion, as part of the Event button’s configuration (section 4.3.7).
5. The instrument implements the Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP), incorporating Multipur-
pose Internet Mail extensions.
6. The instrument does not implement the Short Message Service (SMS) protocol, though it is able
to send SMS messages to a mobile phone via an appropriate server or gateway. As some servers/
gateways use the ‘subject’ as the SMS message, and others use the body text, these alternatives are
provided for in the Protocol pick list in the Configuration page described above.
7. A new event source ‘Email fail’ can be used to trigger a job list should an e-mail send failure occur.
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Field 1 Type Date & Time
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply Discard
Note: The Style, Point and Line feed settings described below apply only to printed outputs and
have no effect when presented on the ‘chart’ or in the message log.
STYLE See figure 4.3.20b for examples of ‘Normal’, ‘Bold’, ‘Emphasised’ and ‘Banner’ print
styles. For all styles, if the text is too long to fit on one line it ‘wraps round’ as shown
(for normal style) in the figure.
EtherNet/IP makes use of the CIP (Control & Information Protocol), common network, transport and
application layers currently implemented by DeviceNet and ControlNet. Standard Ethernet and TCP/IP
technology is used to transport CIP communications packets. The result is a common, open application
layer on top of Ethernet and TCP/IP protocols.
In order to record and trend data that has been written by the client, the relevant channel or maths
channel must be configured with ‘Input Type’ set to ‘Ethernet/IP Comms Input’ and the channel must be
included in a Recording-enabled group. See sections, 4.3.2 (Group configuration), 4.3.3 (Channel con-
figuration) and 4.3.11 (maths configuration) as necessary.
MESSAGING
Ethernet/IP uses two forms of messaging:
UNCONNECTED MESSAGING
This is used in the connection establishment process and for infrequent, low-priority messages. The
unconnected resources in a device are called the ‘Unconnected Message Manager’ (UCMM).
CONNECTED MESSAGING
This uses resources within each node that are dedicated, in advance, to a particular purpose, such as fre-
quent explicit message transactions or real-time I/O data transfers. Connection resources are reserved
and configured using communications services available via the UCMM.
The process of opening a connection is called ‘Connection Origination’. The node that initiates the con-
nection establishment request is called the ‘Connection Originator’ (or ‘Originator’) and the node that
responds to the establishment request is called a ‘Connection Target’ (or ‘Target’). Ethernet/IP has two
types of messaging connections:
Notes:
1. The syntax is not case sensitive; for example, it may be ‘Channel’, or ‘channel’ or ‘CHANNEL’.
2. Channels 1 to 18 (small frame) and 1 to 48 (large frame), may be configured as measuring chan-
nels or as Ethernet/IP comms input channels. The remaining channels, up to 100, must be con-
figured as Ethernet/IP Comms input channels. For channels 76 to 100, only ‘pv’ is supported.
Channel.n.pv Channel ‘n’ process value where ‘n’ = 1 to 100 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.status Channel ‘n’ status, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.spanhi The Span High value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.spanlo The Span Low value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.dp Number of decimal places for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error is made during editing, a brief description of the error can be viewed by operating the ‘Show
Errors’ key:
?Out of Range this means that the channel or maths number is greater than the maximum given in
the description above (e.g. channel 101)
?Syntax Error There is an error in capitalisation, or commas have been used instead of full stops
(periods) or some other text error has been made.
?Unsupported Data A suffix implying a data type which is not supported by this implementation of Ether-
Net/IP has been appended. (Example: Channel.4.alm).
If the ‘Apply’ key is operated whilst there are uncorrected errors, a message appears showing the
number of first input in which a fault has been found. The user must correct the fault and operate ‘Apply’
again in order to save the configuration. If there are further errors, the message reappears showing in
which input the next error lies (Input two in the figure below).
Config
EtherNet/IP:Invalid Item (2)
Ok
Note: The ‘Show Errors’ key allows the user to view all current configuration errors at the same
time. In this display, each valid parameter displays its associated Modbus address, but any error
channels display an error message instead.
The wizard offers a quick and easy way of loading the Input Table by touching the required point param-
eters and then entering start and end values for the range of points to be included. For current software,
the Output table is not editable, so any changes made in the Wizard are ignored.
EtherNet/IP Input Table Wizard
Configure Cancel
Clicking on this key causes the relevant table to be populated with a default set of parameters.
For input tables, these parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to
Math.100.pv.
The output table parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to Math.100.pv.
Clicking on this key causes the parameter addresses to appear after the parameter names in the input
and output tables. If a syntax or other error has been made in loading the input table, a description of
the error type appears in this view (see ‘ERROR MESSAGES’, above).
In all cases, the addresses for the output parameters can be viewed by operating the ‘Show errors’ key. The ad-
dresses for channels 1 to 75 and maths 1 to 100 can be found as described in Section 8.4.3 (Channel Runtime
data), and section 4.3.11 (Maths channel Run-time data). Addresses for channels 76 to 100, are given below:
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel.76.pv Channel 76 process value Scaled Read only FCBF (64703) 1
Channel.77.pv Channel 77 process value Scaled Read only FCC2 (64706) 1
Channel.78.pv Channel 78 process value Scaled Read only FCC5 (64709) 1
Channel.79.pv Channel 79 process value Scaled Read only FCC8 (64712) 1
Channel.80.pv Channel 80 process value Scaled Read only FCCB (64715) 1
Channel.81.pv Channel 81 process value Scaled Read only FCCE (64718) 1
Channel.82.pv Channel 82 process value Scaled Read only FCD1 (64721) 1
Channel.83.pv Channel 63 process value Scaled Read only FCD4 (64724) 1
Channel.84.pv Channel 64 process value Scaled Read only FCD7 (64727) 1
Channel.85.pv Channel 65 process value Scaled Read only FCDA (64730) 1
Channel.86.pv Channel 66 process value Scaled Read only FCDD (64733) 1
Channel.87.pv Channel 67 process value Scaled Read only FCE0 (64736) 1
Channel.88.pv Channel 68 process value Scaled Read only FCE3 (64739) 1
Channel.89.pv Channel 69 process value Scaled Read only FCE6 (64742) 1
Channel.90.pv Channel 70 process value Scaled Read only FCE9 (64745) 1
Channel.91.pv Channel 71 process value Scaled Read only FCEC (64748) 1
Channel.92.pv Channel 72 process value Scaled Read only FCEF (64751) 1
Channel.93.pv Channel 73 process value Scaled Read only FCF2 (64754) 1
Channel.94.pv Channel 74 process value Scaled Read only FCF5 (64757) 1
Channel.95.pv Channel 75 process value Scaled Read only FCF8 (64760) 1
Channel.96.pv Channel 76 process value Scaled Read only FCFB (64763) 1
Channel.97.pv Channel 77 process value Scaled Read only FCFE (64766) 1
Channel.98.pv Channel 78 process value Scaled Read only FD01 (64769) 1
Channel.99.pv Channel 79 process value Scaled Read only FD04 (64772) 1
Channel.100.pv Channel 80 process value Scaled Read only FD07 (64775) 1
CONFIGURING A PLC
The following instructions describe how to configure a PLC to communicate with a Paperless graphic
recorder. Although a specific PLC was used in generating these instructions, the detail should be general
enough to allow any other PLC to be used.
CAUTION
Power must be maintained during the Update process (which may take some tens of minutes).
Loss of power during update may render the PLC inoperative.
1. In the ‘File’ menu select ‘New’, or click on the ‘New Tool’ icon . The ‘New Controller’ window
opens (figure 4.3.21g).
2. Select the relevant PLC from the drop-down menu. Enter a name, if required and click on ‘OK’ After
some seconds, the selected controller’s window opens.
3. Open the ‘Who active’ window, and select the relevant instrument from the hierarchy. Click on
‘Download’.
4. When the download is complete, right click on the relevant Ethernet port in the left pane ‘tree’, and
select ‘Properties’ (figure 4.3.21h).
Figure 4.3.21g New Controller window Figure 4.3.21h Ethernet port location
5. The Module Properties window opens. Select the ‘Port Configuration’ tab. For fixed IP Address ap-
plications, ‘uncheck’ the ‘Enable BootP’ check box, and enter an appropriate IP address and Subnet
mask for the PLC.
6. Click on ‘Set’, and click on ‘OK’ on the warnings and notes displays.
7. Click on ‘OK’ to close the Properties window.
8. Left click on the ‘Program’ icon (figure 4.3.21j) and select ‘Go OffLine’ from the menu which appears.
Figure 4.3.21l Right click on the EtherNet Figure 4.3.21m The communications list
symbol (unexpanded)
3. Using the scroll bar as necessary, click on the ‘Generic EtherNet Module’ item (figure 4.3.21n) and
click on ‘OK’ (or double click on the selected item).
4. In the Parameters page that appears (figure 4.3.21p), enter a name for the module, and set the follow-
ing values:
Comm Format: Data - INT
Address/Host name: The IP address of the recorder (from Operator/Network/Address menu)
Input: 100; size: 200
Output: 112; size: 200
Configuration: 1; size 0
5. Tick (click on) the ‘Open Module Properties’ checkbox if it is not already ticked.
6. Click on ‘OK”
Figure 4.3.21n ‘Select Generic EtherNet Module’ Figure 4.3.21p Enter parameters
RECORDER CONFIGURATION
1. At the recorder. log in (section 3.3.1).
2. In the Operator/Config menu, touch the ‘Options’ item (at the bottom of the list). Check that ‘Ether-
Net/IP’ is enabled. If not, the software needs to be upgraded as described in section 4.6.3 and an
‘Autoconfigure’ carried out.
3. In the Operator/Config/Channels area (section 4.3.3), configure the channels as appropriate. Those
channels which are to receive data from the PLC should have their ‘Input Type’’ set to ‘EtherNet/IP
Comms Input’. The System/Copy facility (section 4.6.8) can be used to speed up the process. Maths
channels are set up is a similar way (section 4.3.11).
4. Set scale, units etc. to appropriate values.
Note... For the EtherNet/IP application, the number of decimal places is set to zero by default.
Editing this value may lead to loss of resolution in the values displayed.
5. Configure the EtherNet/IP input table as required (described earlier in this section).
7. Ensure that the PLC is connected to the recorder either directly using a cross-over EtherNet cable or
via a switch using non cross-over cable.
RUN MODE
1. Set the PLC into either ‘Remote’ or ‘Run’ mode.
2. Set the PLC online
STATUS INDICATORS
The status indicators at the top left corner of the RSLogix 5000 Page (Figure 4.3.21s) show the status of
the link between the pc and the PLC.
Status indicators PLC Mode indicator
It is possible to check that the PLC is communicating with the recorder using the ‘Tags’ display to write
values to the recorder and to receive values from it. Once it is proved that the link is working, the pc may
be disconnected from the PLC if required.
4.3.22 Options
(currently 1)
(currently 0)
(currently 0)
Touching this key calls a display showing the current recorder hardware/software setup, for example the
number of input channels fitted, the number of output relay boards fitted, and how many relays are fitted
per card. Subsequently, should further options be fitted (relay board two and Analogue output board 1 in
the above example), this page shows the difference between the hardware actually fitted and the hard-
ware the recorder software is configured for (currently ...). Whenever there is a difference, the ‘Autocon-
figure’ key can be pressed to alert the recorder to the fact that extra options have been added (or taken
away).
If no changes have occurred since last switch-on, then the ‘(currently ...)’ fields and the ‘Autoconfigure’ key
do not appear.
Initially, the trial mode is set to expire 30 days after enabling (whether the recorder is powered or not).
Any change in configuration results in a pop-up message stating how much of the 30 days period re-
mains. Once Trial mode is disabled by the user, the remaining Trial Time Remaining’ value is retained
until Trial Mode is re-enabled.
Notes:
1. Trial mode enables/disables all options or features (except ‘Simulation’ and ‘History Mainte-
nance’) which are not fitted or enabled in the recorder. The number and distribution of virtual
channels reverts to that configured before Trial mode was invoked.
2. When disabling Trial mode, all configuration for the trial features is lost. Should the user decide
to purchase a trial feature, then it is recommended that the trial configuration be saved (see
section 4.2) so that it may be restored once the purchased trial feature is fitted and enabled
(keycodes cannot be entered in Trial Mode).
3. Trial mode can be enabled only by users with ‘Perform upgrades’ permission (section 4.4.1).
VIRTUAL CHANNELS
Virtual channels are Maths channels, Totalisers and Counters. The total number of virtual channels is as
specified at time of order. The user can select whatever combination of maths channels, totalisers and
counters is required, so long as the total does not exceed the number of virtual channels available. If it
does, a warning is given when the ‘Apply’ button is operated, and the edit is ignored.
Note: If more than 100 maths channels are configured, then the Modbus register addresses of
totalisers and counters are affected. If for example there were 105 maths channels, then the value
of totaliser 1 would be found at the address normally associated with totaliser 6, and the value of
counter 1 would be found at the address normally associated with counter 6.
TREND FREEZE
When this ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) is initiated, the displays are held at their values at the time
of initiation. When the recorder is ‘unfrozen’ the displays switch to their current values, and the clock re-
starts from where it stopped. No blue line is drawn across the trace to indicate time discontinuity (Time
change records - section 3.4).
Note: If ‘SNTP client enable’ is enabled (Network Address area - section 4.5), then the recorder
time is synchronised at power-up only. I.E. the normal checks of recorder time compared with
server time are not carried out with the Simulator option enabled.
If ‘SNTP server enable’ is enabled, then the recorder will supply recorder time.
CLEAR
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) clears the display. Used in conjunction with ‘Erase all History
(below), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
This ‘Recording’ category job (section 4.7.10) erases all the history files in the recorder. Used in conjunc-
tion with ‘Clear’ (above), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
Note: If the 21CFR11 option is enabled, Erase All History jobs can be triggered, but are ignored,
leaving the recording history unaffected.
SCREEN SAVER
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) switches the display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver
Display’ (Instrument Configuration - section 4.3.1) for the duration of the job. The job overrides the ‘Save
after’ time value also set up in Instrument Configuration.
4.4 SECURITY
Touching this key allows the operator to select ‘Login’ (described in section 3.3.1), ‘Access’, ‘Manage-
ment’ or ‘Add/Remove User’ for configuration. Selecting ‘Access’ displays the current user level. Touch-
ing this area allows the user to select ‘Logged out’, ‘Operator’, ‘Engineer’ or any of the added users. The
user may also go directly to logged out mode by operating the ‘Logout’ key.
For users with Security Manager option enabled, ‘Change Password’ and ‘Clear Password Cache’ may
also appear in this menu depending on the user’s access level.
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
User Engineer
Login (Section 3.3.1) Password expires in 29 Days
Login
Access Logout
Management
Access
Add User Access when Engineer
(Section 4.4.1)
Remove User Domain name
Change Password Section 4.4.5 New Password ***
Clear Password Cache Section 4.4.6 Retype Password ***
Management option
Connect from remote
(Section 4.4.2)
Login Disabled
Record Logins Edit Own Password
Login Timeout 1 Minutes Change Alarm Setpoints
with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Acknowledge Alarms
Password Retries 3 times Edit Maths Constant
Passwords Expire 30 Days Reset maths
Minimum Password Length 3 Preset Totalisers
Require Signing Preset Counters
Require Authorization Start/reset Timers
Enable Audit Trail Set Clock
Password Change on Expiry
Adjust I/O
Centralised Security
Remove User Archiving Control
Login By User List
(Section 4.4.4) Save/Restore
Apply Discard Paste/Delete Files
User User Full Name Full Configuration
Remove Full Security
Batch Control
Apply Discard Can Sign
Can Authorize
Perform Upgrades
Add User (Section 4.4.3) Event Permission 1
New User ID Event Permission 2
New Full User Name Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
New Domain Name
Event Permission 5
New Password Edit Output Channel Default
Retype Password Action Demand Writes
Based On Operator Force Change Of Password
Enter Batch Data
Add
Allow web server
Apply Discard Apply Discard
Note: To allow free access to the recorder configuration, the password can be set to ‘blank’. This
allows subsequent access without a password having to be entered (not for recorders with either
Auditor option fitted).
Users with Full Security permission can Add (and Delete) users (sections 4.4.3, 4.4.4) and assign them
individual passwords and access permissions.
Once logged in at Engineer level, operate the New Password ** Password functions do not appear
for 'Logged-out' level of access or
Security key and select Access. A page similar Retype Password ** if Domain is not left blank.
to that shown in figure 4.4.1 appears, allow- Connect from remote
ing the permissions to be set for the various Remote user name Fred Remote user fields appear
access levels and for individual users. The list Remote password only if 'Connect from
remote' is enabled
of parameters is the same for all access levels Retype remote password
except for ‘Logged out’, for which the pass- Login Disabled
Edit own Password Password functions do not
word parameters and ‘login disabled’ items do appear for 'Logged-out'
not appear. Change Alarm Setpoints level of access.
Acknowledge Alarms
Note: If the Security management option is Edit Maths Constant
fitted, and ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled Reset Maths
These fields appear only if
in the Security/Management system (sec- Preset Totalisers the relevant options are
tion 4.4.2), permissions are ‘Read Only’ (i.e., Preset Counters fitted
not editable) at the recorder. Start/Reset Timers
In such a case permissions can be changed Set Clock
only by using the Security Management Adjust I/O
software. Archiving Control
Save/Restore = Enabled
Paste/Delete Files
Full Configuration
Full Security
Batch Control
Can Sign
Can Authorize These fields appear only
if the Auditor 21CFR11
Perform Upgrades option is enabled.
Event Permission 1
Event Permission 2
Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
Event Permission 5
Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes appears
Action Demand Writes only if the Master Comms
option is fitted.
Force Change of Password
Enter Batch Data
Allow web server
Apply Discard
DOMAIN NAME
For units fitted with Security Manager option only, this allows a security domain name of up to 60 charac-
ters to be entered, for the user selected in the ‘Access when’ field. If the default (blank) is not edited, then
the user can gain access using password setup in the ‘New password’ field described below. If a new
domain name is entered here, or if one already appears, the ‘New Password’ and ‘Retype Password’ fields
are not displayed, and the user must use his or her network login password, as allocated by the user’s IT
department or Network administrator.
Details of the Active Directory Server are entered in Network/Address configuration (section 4.5.1). Pass-
words can be edited as described in ‘Change Password’ (section 4.4.5)
If ‘Centralised security’ is enabled in the Security/Management menu (section 4.4.2) then the Domain
name can be configured only using Security Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
These fields allow a new password to be entered for the selected access level or User. The password
must also be entered in the ‘Re-type Password’ field. If the two differ, a warning message (Passwords did
not match) appears when the APPLY key is operated, and password entry must be repeated. If the pass-
word does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management (if fitted) (section
4.4.2), a warning message (Invalid Password) appears when the ‘Apply’ key is operated, and password
entry must be repeated.
To make use of the Web server facility (Annex C), ‘Allow web server’ (below) must also be enabled.
To allow unrestricted view-only to the host, ‘Logged out’ permission level should be selected and then a
user name of ‘anonymous’ entered, and the password field left blank.
Notes:
1. Remote login will be refused if the user account is disabled for any reason.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the ‘local’ password
are non-identical.
3. Attempts to establish a Bridge connection will fail if the relevant Remote User Name contains
characters with ASCII codes greater than 127 (such as é, è, a., ü etc.). Section B6 (Annex B)
shows codes 0 to 127.
Note: This feature should be used with discretion, or the situation might arise in which the record-
er cannot be logged onto, either at a particular access level or at all. It is recommended that at
least one user with Engineer-level access is retained with login enabled, or it may become neces-
sary to return the recorder to the manufacturer, or to arrange for a service visit.
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS
Allows each user with this permission enabled to acknowledge alarms (section 3.1.4)
RESET MATHS
Allows the user to reset applicable maths functions. See section 4.3.11 for further details of maths func-
tions.
PRESET TOTALISERS
Allows the user to preset totaliser values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.12 for further details of
totalisers.
PRESET COUNTERS
Allows the user to preset counter values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.13 for further details of
Counters.
START/RESET TIMERS
Allows the user to start and reset the timer value. See section 4.3.14 for further details of timers.
SET CLOCK
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to set the recorder time and date functions under System/
Clock
ADJUST I/O
Allows the user to adjust recorder inputs and outputs as described in section 4.6.4, and section 9 below.
SAVE/RESTORE
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to saving and restoring functions as described
in section 4.2, above. Without this permission, the SAVE/RESTORE key does not appear.
PASTE/DELETE FILES
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to Paste and Delete files as described in section 5.
FULL CONFIGURATION
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access the recorder configuration.
FULL SECURITY
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to all recorder security functions.
BATCH CONTROL
This field appears only if the Batch Option (section 4.3.10) is fitted. Allows the user to enter batch data
and to start, stop and create new batches. If this access permission is set, ‘Enter Batch Data’ below, is
automatically enabled and cannot be disabled.
CAN SIGN
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to change
the configuration of the recorder (according to the other permissions set for the login), providing the se-
curity management system ‘Require Authorization’ is not enabled. If it is, changes can be made only if the
correct password for a user with ‘Can Authorize’ permission is entered. See section 4.4.2 for details
CAN AUTHORIZE
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to
change the configuration of the recorder according to the permissions set for the login. See section 4.4.2
for details of the Auditor options.
PERFORM UPGRADES
‘Upgrade’ appears in the system menu only for access levels in which this box is ticked. Section 4.6.3
contains further details. Trial mode (section 4.3.22 ) can be enabled/disabled only by users with Perform
Upgrades permission.
EVENT PERMISSION 1
If this is enabled, then this login will trigger an event source which remains active for as long as the login
is active. See section 4.3.6 (Event Sources: User Logged In) for further details.
EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5
As for Event permission 1, above.
When enabled, this allows a user with this login to write values manually over master comms either di-
rectly, by job action or (if the option is fitted), by using the User Screens ‘Operator’ key. Where Demand
Writes are initiated by Job action, the job will be carried out whether or not this login has permission to
action Demand Writes.
Note:
When Audit trail is enabled, only the newly written value appears in the audit trail messages.
This is because the instrument has no way of determining what the value of the parameter was
before the write occurred.
The messages are of the form:
23/08/05 10:14:30 Auto Mode wrote 19.37
23/08/05 10:14:29 Demand write Auto Mode, Signed Engineer, No Auth. Reqd., Note
where ‘Auto Mode’ is the descriptor associated with the demand write, and ‘19.37’ is the value written.
FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD
When this checkbox is enabled for a user, it means that the user will have to change password at his/her
next login. At next log in, a pop-up dialogue box requests that a new password be entered. If a new
password is not entered, login is denied.
Entering the new password clears the checkbox, so this is a ‘one-shot’ operation, until the checkbox is
enabled again by a user with ‘Engineer’ level access.
Change Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply Logout
If ‘Batch Control’ is not enabled, then enabling this item allows the user to enter batch data, but not to
start, stop or create new batches.
The 21CFR11 option allows the recorder to be set up so that all changes to configuration (with the ex-
ceptions listed below) are added to the history files and also allows certain constraints to be placed on
the recorder passwords. Once these items of configuration are set up, they apply to all groups. Figure
4.4.2a, below, shows the configuration menu.
Record Logins
Login Timeout 1 Minutes
This field appearsonly if Login
timeout is non-zero with unapplied changes Ignore timeout
Password Attempts 3 times
Passwords Expire 30 Days
Minimum Password Length 3
Require Signing
This field appears only if
'Require Signing' is enabled Require Authorization
Enable Audit Trail
Password Change on Expiry This item appears only if the Securiy Management
option is fitted. If enabled, all other security fields can
Centralised Security be edited only via Security Management software.
Login By User List
This item appears only if one or more of Security
Apply Discard Management, Audit trail or 21CFR11 options is
fitted.
Record Logins
Enable Audit Trail
This item appears only if the Centralised Security
Centralised Security Security Management option
Login By user List
is fitted. Login By user List
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the following parameters appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 op-
tion is fitted.
2. If Centralised Security is enabled, none of the other parameters in this menu can be edited at
the recorder. Changes can be made only using Security Management software.
Record logins For either Auditor option, if this field is enabled, then each time a new login occurs a
message appears, giving the date, time and login name. E.G.
23/08/08 15:32:20 Login by Frederick Bloggs
Logouts are recorded in a similar way - e.g.
23/08/08 15:49:43 Logout by Frederick Bloggs
If the login or logout is via a ‘Bridge’ session (section 6), the IP address of that viewer
appears in the login/logout message - e.g.
23/08/05 15:58:03 Login by (149.121.130.126)Engineer
Login Timout When set to zero, the login remains valid until changed. For any other value, the user
is logged out after the number of minutes entered here has elapsed since the last
time the screen was touched.
with unapplied changes
This field does not appear if the Login Timeout has been set to zero. For non-zero
time-out values, this allows the user to choose whether
a any unapplied changes are lost when the Login Timeout period has elapsed, or
b the login timeout is ignored if there are any unapplied configuration changes.
Password Attempts For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this allows the user to limit to three, the number of attempt that can
be made to enter a password. The choices are ‘3 times’ and ‘unlimited’. When set to
3 times, the user login is disabled after three incorrect attempts to enter the pass-
word have been made. A ‘System Message’ appears on the screen and is also sent
to the ‘chart’:
23/08/08 13:20:42 User Frederick Bloggs, login disabled, invalid password
In order to re-enable the login, a user with Engineer access level must deselect
‘Login Disabled’ in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1, above.
Passwords expire For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this field allows the user to set an expiry period of up to 999 days
which applies to all passwords. The number of days remaining to expiry is shown in
the login page. If set to zero, then the expiry period does not apply.
Note: All required passwords MUST be changed within this number of days or all logins will be
disabled In this situation, the configuration of the recorder will be available only to those with
Service Level access and in most cases, a call will have to be made to the recorder supplier or serv-
ice agency. (But see ‘Password Change on Expiry’, below)
Config
Authorised Engineer
Appears only if 'Requires Authorising' enabled
Password ***
Operator Note
Ok
Ok Cancel
Notes:
1. The Configuration Revision (and for changes in the Security menus - the Security Revision) are
incremented every time the recorder configuration (security configuration) is changed. The
current values can be viewed in the System/About menu (section 4.6.11).
2. All configuration and security changes must be made either at the recorder operator interface,
or from a host pc using Bridge ‘Full’ software. Use of the configuration editor is not permitted if
traceability is to be maintained.
3. If fitted, Event buttons (section 4.3.7) are not included in the Require Signing/Require Authori-
zation regime described above. Instead, each individual button can be configured to require
signing or to require both signing and authorization.
4. If a large number of configuration changes are made with Audit trail enabled, then the number
of messages produced may result in the total amount of data generated exceeding the amount
that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available, particularly if there are
a large number of points configured. The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed,
and a message ‘Recording failed - internal overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest
group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to the situation.
5. If the TUS option is enabled, then enabling Audit trail can causes pre calibration and post
calibration values to be printed for each adjusted channel, before a batch initiation and/or after
a batch stop according to the configuration of the ‘Pre calibration’ and ‘Post calibration’ tick
boxes in the Batch Configuration menu.
Apply Logout
Centralised Security This checkbox occurs only if the Security Management option is fitted.
If this checkbox is enabled, none of the other parameters in the Management menu
can be edited at the recorder (i.e. they become ‘Read Only’). Changes can be made
only by means of Security Management software. At the recorder, the menu items
below also become ‘read only’, or do not appear as menu items or are not selectable,
even if the checkbox appears:
Access level permissions (section 4.1.1) (Read Only)
Add User/ Remove User (section 4.4.3/4) (Do not appear as menu items)
Restore configuration/Security data (section 4.2.2) (Not selectable)
New configuration/Security data (section 4.2.3) (Not selectable)
(Continued...)
Select the required access level and enter the Type in your user ID and a password if
password if required required
Adding a new user clears the recorder’s password cache, as described in section 4.4.6, below.
New User ID
New Full User Name
New Domain Name
New Password
Retype Password
Based On Operator
Add
Apply Discard
NEW USER ID
This field allows a User ID of up to 20 characters to be entered for a new user. This ID is used when logging in us-
ing ID/password entry technique (that is, when ‘Login by user list’ is disabled, as described in section 4.4.2 above).
If ‘Centralised Security’ (section 4.4.2) is enabled this Domain name can be edited only using Security
Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
BASED ON
This picklist allows another user or access level to be used as a permissions template, to simplify the con-
figuration if several operators are to have identical permissions.
Apply Discard
Notes:
1. This feature should be used with discretion, as it affects Network logins which would normally
be under the control of the user’s IT department or Network Administrator. Changing the pass-
word may cause conflicts within the network thus preventing its efficient operation.
2. If ‘Active Directory security’ is set to ‘None’ (section 4.5.1: Network/Address menu), any at-
tempted changes to the password will be rejected. That is, only passwords on a Transport
Layer Security (TLS) secured connection are accepted.
3. The old password remains valid for up to an hour (default) after the change, and during this pe-
riod, both passwords are valid. The default period can be edited by the Network administrator.
Change Password
Change Password
Old Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply Cancel
TROUBLE SHOOTING
If the change password procedure fails:
1. Check that the Active Directory server instrument alarm is inactive (section3.1.3)
2. Check that the connection with the Active Directory server has TLS security enabled (section 4.5.1)
3. Check that the new password’s length, complexity, history and minimum password age match the
criteria laid down in the Active Directory password policy configuration. Password length must also
comply with the minimum password length configured in the security menu (section 4.4.2)
PASSWORD CACHE
Once a password has been authenticated, it is added to a list of up to 100 valid passwords (the Password
cache) held in the recorder. This means that if the Active Directory server is unavailable the next time the
user attempts to log in, then if the password is in the cache, the login will proceed without further authen-
tication.
It is assumed that the person responsible for operating the Active Directory server is familiar with the ba-
sics of setting up a suitable server. The details given below explain the file structure necessary in order
that the Security Manager software may communicate with the server. Briefly, a ‘User’ must be a member
of a ‘Group’, which must be part of an ‘Organizational unit’ (figure 4.4.7a).
Organizational
Unit
2. Right click on the relevant Domain name (symbol = ) and select ‘New’ then ‘Organizational Unit’.
Enter a name for the Unit and click OK.
(Continued)
Touching the Network key calls a selection box to the display, allowing ‘Address’ or ‘Name’ to be selected
for configuration.
4.5.1 Address
Figure 4.5.1 shows the address menu fields.
Apply Discard
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP
This field allows an address to be entered for the recorder. This can be done either by manually entering
an address (IP address field - below), or a network service BootP or DHCP can be used to assign an IP
address to the recorder.
BOOTP TIMEOUT
This 28 second period is the maximum time the recorder will wait, at power-up, for a response from the
BootP server. If no response is received within this time, the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gate-
way are all set to, or remain at 0.0.0.0
Notes:
1. DHCP attempts to connect to the network continuously, until successful. Only when successful
will the network settings be updated and appear at the address page. This can take up to 13
seconds after power up.
2. It takes 2 to 3 minutes for a DHCP failure to be reported, so an instrument alarm would not be
generated for 2 to 3 minutes after power up, should the connection fail to be established.
SUBNET MASK
This field is editable only if ‘Specify an IP address’ is selected in the ‘IP address lookup’ picklist above.
The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits in the host address reserved for sub-network identi-
fication. By convention, all the network address bits are set to 1. The subnet mask is used to identify the
subnet to which an IP address belongs by performing a bitwise AND on the mask and the IP address.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
To deliver traffic from one subnet to another, devices called ‘routers’ or ‘gateways’ are placed between
segments. The default gateway address informs each network device where to send data if the target
station does not reside on the same subnet as the source.
SNTP SERVER
If ‘Obtain from BootP server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ is selected as the IP address look-up (see
above), then this address appears automatically. Otherwise this area allows an IP address to be entered
for the SNTP server.
Notes:
1 SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP/IP network to set their times to that of a server
- port number 123. The recorder can act both as a client and as a server; when acting as a
server, the resolution is 1 msec.
2. SNTP time is based on elapsed seconds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1900. The time is not
affected by time zones or daylight saving adjustments.
3. If the instrument time differs from the SNTP time by less than 2 seconds, the instrument time is
updated gradually (1 msec 8 times a second) to prevent time change events being recorded. If
the difference is greater than 2 seconds, this is defined as a ‘time change event’, the results of
which are that the recorder time is immediately updated, and a green line is drawn across the
chart (vertical/horizontal trend modes only) to indicate the time change.
4. If more than 5 time change events occur within 24 hours, a ‘Time Synchronisation failure’ instru-
ment alarm is set 24 hours after the first event. Once synchronisation is re-established, the
alarm self-clears within 24 hours.
5. An ‘SNTP server failure’ instrument alarm is flagged if the configured server cannot be ac-
cessed, or if the year received from the server is less than 2001 or more than 2035.
(Continued)
If ‘Domain name Service’ is enabled (section 4.5.2), then a domain name may be entered here instead of
an IP address,
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY
This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled. If set to None (default), then any at-
tempt to change a password will be rejected because it has not been encrypted. One of the alternative
TLS ports must be used if passwords are to be changed at the recorder.
When TLS (port 636) is selected all access to the server is secured using TLS on port 636 using the LDAP_
SERVER_START_TLS_OID method. TLS (port 389) is similar but uses TLS on port 389.
Starting from when the server becomes unavailable, once the configured number of days has expired
since the last successful log in (by any user), the Password cache is cleared the next time any user at-
tempts to log in. The user’s password is ‘Invalid’ and a pop-up message (Active Directory Password
Cache has expired) appears. This means that no Domain users can log in until the Active Directory server
becomes available again.
Values of 0 (default) to 30 days can be entered, where a value of 0 disables Cache expiry (i.e. it never
expires).
4.5.2 Name
Figure 4.5.2 shows the ‘Name’ fields
Apply Discard
LOCAL HOST
English language name for the recorder. Non-editable - assigned to the IP Address
DOMAIN
The name of the Group or area of networked units which contains the recorder. Non editable.
DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS)
Enables the mapping of host names to IP addresses and vice-versa.
Notes:
1. Any one or more of the above items may be overwritten if ‘IP address lookup’ is set to ‘Obtain
from BootP Server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ as described under ‘Address’ above.
2. If Domain Name Server is enabled, but either no DNS server is connected to the network or
neither the DNS Primary nor secondary server can be ‘found’, it can take up to four minutes for
the system to timeout. During this period, the recorder’s user interface (touchscreen) will not
respond.
HA028910
Current time HH: MM: S S
Locale
4.6 SYSTEM
Issue 9 June 11
Upgrade
Apply Discard
Input Adjust
Locale
Section 4.6.2 See Section 9 Output Adjust
Input adjust
Section 4.6.4
See Section 4.3.16 Master Comms Diagnostics
Language English
Country United Kingdom Ethernet Diagnostics
First Channel 1 Select first channel for adjust
Time Zone GMT
Last Channel 6 Select final channel for adjust
Use Summertime (DST) See figure 4.6b for
Start at 01:00:00 Select Channels further items
on the Last
Sunday Adjust Channels Initiate adjust-
ment procedure
in March Ethernet Diagnostics
Remove Adjust Remove previ- Section 4.6.7
End at 01:00:00 ous adjustments
on the Last Host 149.121.131.78
Fast Settle
Sunday Ping Status Host Reachable
in October 1) Channel 1 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
Ping Now
Long Date Format 2) Channel 2 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
3) Channel 3 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55 Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
Apply Discard
4) Channel 4 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55 Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Unadjusted Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242
Upgrade 6) Channel 6 4.998
Section 4.6.3 Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Instrument Number 8203 Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89
Add new options Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File EtherNet/IP Clients:
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 217
User Guide
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Page 218
Copy
User Guide
Section 4.6.8
Copy
Source Type Channel
Job Search
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1 Section 4.6.9
4.6 SYSTEM (Cont.)
Job Search
Customise
Copy To 2) Channel 2
Section All Sections
Ð 5) Channel 5 About
Job Category Totaliser
Include alarm data See figure 4.6a for other items
Job Action Preset
Include job data
Search Now
Copy Now About
Section 4.6.11
Default
Support File
Apply Discard
Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Figures 4.6a and 4.6b above, give an overview of the System Menus.
4.6.1 Clock
Selecting ‘clock’ causes the recorder’s date and time to be displayed. To edit the date, touch the current
date area, to call the keyboard and enter the new numbers. The date is edited in a similar way. The set-
tings apply as soon as the ‘Apply settings’ button is touched. See also SNTP details in section 4.5.1.
4.6.2 Locale
This allows the setting of the following items:
Language Choose the required language from the picklist
Country Displays a pick list of countries associated with the selected language
Time zone* Select required time zone from picklist.
Use Summertime (DST)*
Select box if daylight saving is to be used, If ‘Use Summertime (DST)’ is selected, the
times and dates for the start and end of summertime can be entered using picklists -
see figure 4.6a.
Notes
1 Date format DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY is defined by the language and country selected. Time
format (e.g. 12/24 hr. clock) is defined by the country selected.
2. When using Bridge software, the host PC’s locale information and the recorder locale informa-
tion should match, or the displayed time will not be correct.
4.6.3 Upgrade
This allows
1. New options to be enabled (by the entering of a ‘Key Code’) and/or
2. The recorder operating software to be upgraded by reading a file from Compact Flash, SD card or
other local or remote source.
Apply Discard
Host Address/Name
FTP Username
Pccard
FTP Password
Source
Source Path name to upgrade file
Ok Cancel
Ok Cancel
Figure 4.6.3b Remote upgrade details Figure 4.6.3c Local upgrade details
CAUTION
Power to the recorder must be maintained during the upgrade process or the recorder might not power
up. If such a situation arises, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
Notes:
1. Recording is suspended and the user interface (touchscreen) is disabled whilst the upgrade is
in progress. During the subsequent, automatic power cycle, any alarm relays will go into their
alarm states until the recorder has re-initialised.
2. When upgrading from another instrument, using ‘Remote Upgrade’, the I.P. address (or net-
work name) of the source instrument should be typed into the Host Address/Name field, and
‘mediacard’ (or usbfront etc. as appropriate) should be entered in the ‘Source’ field.
3. If ‘Audit trail’ is enabled (see ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2), then system messages are gener-
ated, containing date, time, source and status details of the upgrade.
4. ‘Upgrade’ appears in the System menu only for access levels which have ‘Perform Upgrades’
enabled in Security/Access configuration (section 4.4.1).
5. ‘Signing/Authorizing’ apply to upgrades, if the relevant boxes are ticked in Security/Manage-
ment configuration. See ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2 for further details.
Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘comms’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ permission (see section 4.4.1).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 mins) for it to reach thermal equi-
librium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input.
When the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 4.6.4a shows the initial display which appears when ‘Input adjust’ is first selected from the SYSTEM
menu. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 4.6.4b.
Fast settle
Specify the sensor low point and connect the
corresponding input.
Low Point 0
Apply Discard
Fast settle
Specify the sensor high point and connect the
corresponding input.
High Point 5
Apply Discard
Note: Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for
that channel.
Ping Now
4.6.8 Copy
This facility allows the user to copy a point or group configuration from one point, group etc. to one or
more others. The user may choose whether or not to include alarm and (if applicable) job data when
copying point configurations. Descriptors and colour selections are not copied.
Figure 4.6.8 shows a typical configuration page for copying the configuration of channel 1 (Furnace
Temp1) to channels 2 to 5 inclusive.
Copy To 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
Include alarm data
Include job data
Copy Now
When ‘Copy Now’ is operated, a confirmatory dialogue box opens, to allow the user to check the source
and destination entries.
Copying
From: 1) Furnace Temp 1
To: 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
OK Cancel
Once the copy is complete, the user should enter the configuration area of the items that have been cop-
ied, and edit/apply the changes etc.
COPY RULES
1. The first channel on any input card may not be a digital input type.
2. If a destination channel was a digital input, AND the source channel is an analogue input AND ‘in-
clude alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Absolute high; Threshold = 0.0; Dwell = 0.0.
3. If a destination channel was an analogue input, AND the source channel is a digital input AND ‘in-
clude alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Digital; Threshold = Closed; Dwell = 0.0.
4. Descriptors and Colours are never copied.
Search Now
Search Results
Channels (1), Alarm (1), Job (3)
Channels (3), Alarm (3), Job (1)
Channels (6), Alarm (4), Job (1)
Maths (1), Alarm (2), Job (3)
Ok
4.6.10 Customise
‘Customise’ allows:
1. the background and foreground colours for various screen items to be selected
2. the size of the text font to be varied.
Figure 4.6.10a shows the display page with the settings used for most of the screen drawings in this
manual.
Desktop 54
Data Entry Background 55
Selection 27
Fixed Text 47
Active Text 6
Disabled Text 49
Title Bar Background 41
Trend Foreground 48
Trend Background 55
History Foreground 52
History Background 48
Font set Auto
Default
Apply Discard
4.6.11 About
Selecting ‘About’ from the System key menu gives details of the version numbers of different aspects of
the recorder, and details of the amount of memory fitted. Figure 4.6.11 shows a typical ‘About’ display
page.
Appears only when
viewing via
Bridge software
INSTRUMENT VARIANT
Displays the instrument type.
CONFIG REVISION
Whenever a change to the Configuration of the recorder is applied the ‘Config Revision’ is incremented.
For these purposes, Configuration is defined as including all items within the menu structures of the
Config and Network keys, and includes User Screens. It does not include those items associated with the
Security key. Config Revision is printed on the ‘chart’ at power up, and if either Auditor option or if the
Batch option is fitted, Config Revision is included in the messages associated with these options.
Notes:
1. Config Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths chan-
nel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths function details.
2. Config Revision can be embedded in one or more messages, as described in section 4.3.8.
LAST UPDATED
The time and date at which the configuration was last edited.
AT VERSION
The version number at the time of the last configuration update.
CREATED ON
Shows the type of instrument that the configuration was created on. Normally, this will be the same as
‘Instrument Variant’, and will be different only if the configuration has been downloaded from a different
instrument model.
Notes:
1 Security Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths chan-
nel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths option details.
2. If ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled, the Security Revision is in a different format (e.g. 15.001) see
section 4.4.2.
SUPPORT FILE
If the unit is not performing as it should (e.g. it resets itself unexpectedly), the Support File key allows the
user to save ‘critical system files’ into a single file (SupportInfo.uhq*), for despatch to the manufacturer
for analysis. This file may be saved to the instrument’s Compact Flash or SD card or, using Bridge ‘Full’
software, to a remote PC. For security reasons, this file cannot be viewed by anyone other than the manu-
facturer or his agents.
Once the save operation is complete, a ‘Support’ message appears on the screen giving details of where
to send the file. More information is held in the file ‘SupportInfo.txt’ which is also saved to the disk. This
file can be opened, and the information within it read, by inserting the disk into a PC, clicking on the
floppy disk icon (A drive) in ‘My Computer’ and then double clicking on the file icon when it appears.
* ‘SupportInfo’ is the default name. This name may be edited by the user before saving to disk or pc. The
.uhq suffix is automatically appended to the new name.
4.7 JOBS
A number of sources (e.g. channel, event, totaliser) can be set up to trigger one or more jobs. The follow-
ing description includes all possible job categories, but which jobs are available on any particular record-
er depends on the options fitted to that recorder. Many job categories require the relevant access level
permission to be set, as described in section 4.4.1, above.
The type of action (continuous or ‘single-shot’), available for selection, depends on the type of trigger
source. Continuous actions are selected from: While active, While inactive or While unacknowledged.
The available single-shot actions are: On becoming active, On becoming inactive, On acknowledgement.
4.7.1 No Action
This means that no job action is configured for the trigger source.
Job Number 1
Category Drive Relay
Relay Board 1
Select Relay
Relay Number 1
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Unacknowledged'
Note: If more than one job is set up to disable a particular totaliser, then any of these jobs going
active will disable the totaliser.
Job Number 1
Category Message Select 'Display', 'All Groups', or 'Specified Group'
Send Message(s) to Specified Group
Group Select Required Group
1) Group 1
(only if 'Specified Group' previously selected)
First Message 1) Message 1
Select range of messages to be output.
Last Message 1) Message 1
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
An alternative way of synchronising recorders is via an SNTP time server as described in section 4.5.1.
Job Number 1
Category Clock
Action Preset
On Active
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or
'Acknowledgement'
Notes
1 Whenever a time change occurs, a green line is drawn across the chart in vertical trend mode.
2 The clock presets to the ‘Preset Hour’ value set in Config/Instrument menu. If, however, ‘Use
Summertime (DST)’ is enabled in System/Locale configuration, then an hour is added whilst
daylight saving time is in operation.
Job Number 1
Category Timer
Action Reset Select 'Reset', 'Start' or 'Disable'
Timer Timer 1 Select Required Timer
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Job Number 1
Category Batch Select 'Start' or 'Stop'
Action Start
Select Required Group
Group 1) Group 1
(only if Scope = Group in Batch Configuration)
On Active
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Acknowledgement'
Job Number 1
Category Recording
Recording Enable Select required action
Group 1) Group 1 Select required Group if appropriate
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Freeze Freezes process variables and trend displays, stops the recorder clock and stops
data further writing of history files (but see note). When the job deactivates, process
values/trends are updated to their current values, the clock restarts from its frozen
value and writing to history files is resumed. No blue line is drawn across the chart.
Clear Clears the trend displays from the screen.
Saver Display Sets the recorder display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver display’ in Instru-
ment configuration (section 4.3.1) . Overrides the ‘Save after’ value.
Job Number 1
Category Trend
Action Speed/Interval B Select required action
Group 1) Group 1 Select Required Group or Point (according to action)
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Note: in order to ensure that no further data is written to the recorder’s history files, recording
must be disabled by setting a second, ‘Recording’, job to be initiated by the same trigger as initi-
ates the Freeze job. This Recording job should be set to ‘Enable’, ‘while Inactive’. Recording jobs
are described in section 4.7.10, above.
An output job allows a specific output channel write to be disabled when the recorder is acting as a mod-
bus master.
Job Number 1
Category Output
Action Disable Write
Output 1) Output 1 Select required output
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Demand Writes jobs allow the user to set up the recorder so that, when the job is triggered, it initiates the
selected Demand Write. The write action is performed to the remote device as defined in Demand Write
Configuration described in section 4.3.18.
Job Number 1
Category Demand writes
Action Write
Acyclic 1) Write 1 Select Required Write number
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Job Number 1
Select required Acknowledge
Category Alarm
or Disable function
Action Acknowledge Alarms on Group
Group 1) Group Select Required Group (or point)
1
On Acknowledgement Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
These jobs copy the archiving functions available from the ‘Archive’ key described in section 4.1 of this
document. For ‘FTP’ items see ‘Remote archiving’; for ‘Media’ see ‘Local Archive’.
Job Number 1
Category Archive
Action Bring Media Archive Up to Date Select required Archive function
On Acknowledgement Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Category Report
If destination = 'Group',
Group 3) Furnace 3 select destination group.
SEND REPORT TO
Allows the user to select ‘Group’ or an ASCII printer (if fitted - requires Serial Comms. option) as the
report destination. If ‘Group’ is selected (as in the figure above), a further field appears allowing the user
to specify the group to which the report is to be sent (Group 3 in the figure above). If a printer is selected,
the report is sent to the printer.
GROUP
This field appears only if ‘Group’ has been selected as the report destination, and allows the destination
group to be defined. If a group descriptor has been entered (‘Furnace 3’ in the figure above), then this
descriptor appears in the field.
REPORT
This defines which of the reports is to be sent when the job is triggered. If a Report descriptor has been
entered, then this appears in the field (‘Current temps’ in the figure above).
5 FILE
Figure 5, below, gives an overview of the File Menus. The area is entered by touching the ‘File’ key of the
root menu, and can be used to display the contents of directories stored both in the user area of flash
memory and on any bulk storage device inserted or connected.
The first display page shows the ‘volume’ or ‘device’ names associated with the various areas of memory
available to the user. If one of these volume names is selected (touched), and the ‘open-folder’ key* op-
erated, the contents of the selected volume is displayed. This would typically consist of a list of folders.
Similarly, if a folder name is selected and the ‘open folder’ key* is touched, the contents of the folder is
displayed and so on.
The path name of the current window is shown at the top of the window.
*Note: The open-folder and close-folder key functions are the same as the down arrow and up arrow key
functions respectively.
* i.e. displayed in the colour selected for ‘Disabled Text’ in the System key ’Customise’ menu.
5 FILE (Cont.)
Root Open
Key 2 Folder
Engineer 13:35:29
Root Menu No batch In Progress 06/10/05
Engineer 13:35:49
No batch In Progress 4 06/10/05
\mediacard\ Hide
Engineer 13:35:59
No batch In Progress 6 06/10/05
\mediacard\history Hide
Engineer 13:36:09
No batch In Progress 8 06/10/05
\mediacard\history\group1\ Hide
Engineer 13:36:49
No Batch In Progress 06/10/05
\mediacard\history\group1\000 Hide
Operate
10 Options key
Filer Options
Note: New Delete
The down arrow navigation key
can be used as an alternative Cut Copy
The subfolder names are the numerical part of the first history file that they contain.
For example if the first file name is Furnace1 Temp~20080912 80155F2601000120.uhh, then the subdirec-
tory name will be 20080912 80155F2601000120.
If there are more than 32 files, the next subdirectory name is 20080912 80155F2601000140 (assuming the
file names are contiguous).
SD or
Flash card
history\
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This feature comes in two levels, called ‘Full’ (option) and ‘Lite’ (supplied as standard).
The ‘Full’ option allows full operation and configuration of the recorder, simultaneously, from up to ten
PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below. When a change is being made to the
configuration of the recorder by one Bridge user (‘client’), the message:
Feature Locked
Another client (IP ADDRESS) has locked this feature.
Wait for lock to be released and try again
appears on the screen of any other user who attempts to change the configuration. When changes are
complete, the message:
Feature changed
Synchronising data
appears on the screens of all clients (except that of the one making the change).
Bridge ‘Lite’ allows the user to view recorder standard screens, dynamically, on-line, from up to 10 PCs
which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below.
The software is supplied on a CD ROM, which also includes PC Review, PC Configuration and Acrobat
reader software and various manuals relevant to the recorder.
The Bridge software is suitable for any physical hardware configurations, some common examples being:
1. A single PC connected directly to a recorder.
2. Multiple PCs connected via a network to one or more recorders. (Each recorder can be accessed, si-
multaneously, by a maximum of 10 PCs, but one PC can look at only ‘N’ recorders where ‘N’ depends
on how much memory is available at the PC. For example, a minimum specification computer (sec-
tion 6.1.1) running Windows NT can ‘look at’ up to three recorders simultaneously.
3. A single PC connected via a telephone line to a remote recorder.
This manual does not describe network setup in detail, as each network is different. In most cases, the
help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required, for example, in the allocation of valid
addresses and passwords.
Notes:
1 When logging in via ‘Bridge’, only users with ‘Connect from Remote’ enabled appear in the user
list. See section 4.4.1 for details.
2 Full Bridge requires some small amount of space on the PC disk. The message ‘There appears
to be no free disk space on the client. Create some space and run again.’ appears if there is
insufficient space.
3. If an attempt is made to establish more than one Full Bridge connection between a PC and an
instrument, the message “You are already running a Full Bridge session with this instrument.
The new session will run as Bridge Lite.” appears.
4. If an attempt is made to establish a Full Bridge connection using the ‘anonymous’ user name,
the following message appears:
‘You are authenticating Full Bridge using the “anonymous” user name. This provides guest read
only access. To establish Full Bridge connection you must use a different user name. Please
change and try again.’
5. The maximum number of Bridge sessions that can be run simultaneously on one recorder is 10.
Note: For direct connection between a PC and the recorder, a crossover cable is required. For all
other connections, a ‘straight-through’ connection is required.
The dial-up router (available from computer suppliers etc.) has an associated telephone number, and can
also have a security password system. Both the telephone number and any password(s) must be known
to the PC user before any attempt at communication is made.
The PC can be set up to dial the number automatically, or the number may be dialled manually. Reference
should be made to the computer documentation or help pages if necessary.
Recorder
'phone
socket
Dial-up
Recorder router
'phone
socket
Host
computer Modem
For PCs remote from a networked system which is permanently connected to the internet, it is necessary
to obtain an IP address (or name) and the required passwords in order to establish connections between
the PC and the recorder(s). In many cases it is also necessary that the internal network and ‘firewall’ (if
such exists) be configured to allow access.
For PCs remote from a networked system which is not connected to the internet, a system similar to that
shown in figure 6.2.2 is needed.
6.4.1 Network
The Network key fields are fully described in Section 4.5.
6.4.2 Options
In order to make the ‘Full’ option accessible, it must first be correctly entered in the Options Menu. If the
Bridge level displayed does not match the ‘currently’ value (if displayed), operation of the ‘Autoconfigure’
key will add the option to the database.
If all options are correctly entered, the ‘Currently’ fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear.
(currently 1)
(currently 0)
(currently 0)
6.4.3 Access
Each of the access levels and user IDs can have ‘Connect from Remote’ access enabled. When this box
is checked, password entry fields appear as shown in figure 6.4.3. Initially, the Remote User Name is the
same as the login name or access level. Enter the required User name and password, then re-type the
password to ensure it was entered correctly. This name and password are required when establishing
connection with the host computer.
Notes:
1. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, the minimum password length is that set in the Secu-
rity/Management menu described in section 4.4.2. For all recorders, the maximum password
length is 20 characters.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the local password be
non-identical.
Once the program starts, a Host name and User name will be requested as depicted in figure 6.5a.
Enter the Local host name (e.g. Andy136-4) found in the recorder Network/Name area, followed by a dot
(full stop, period) followed by the domain name (e.g. FishesRus.co.uk) (also in the Network/Name area).
These examples would result in an entry of Andy136-4.FishesRus.co.uk
Notes
1 If frequent use is to be made of this option, it is recommended that a ‘short-cut’ be created, and
placed on the computer desktop. To create a new Bridge link: right click on the desktop, left
click ‘New’ in the pop up menu which appears, then left click on the Bridge icon. When naming
Bridge files, the extension .uhv must be used.
2 If there is no DNS server associated with the system, the IP address (found in the recorder Net-
work/Address area) should be used instead.
3. The PC locale setting (e.g. Daylight Saving Time) must match that set in the recorder (System/
Locale) or the displayed time will be incorrect.
4. If an attempt is made to start the program whilst another user is configuring the recorder, a
‘Feature Locked’ message appears: ‘Another client (instrument) has locked this feature. Retry-
ing until successful’ appears. As soon as the other client ‘Saves’ the new recorder configura-
tion, this message disappears and the program continues its startup.
Enter the user name as entered in the recorder’s Security/Access/Remote user name field (section 6.4.3).
If password entry is not required, disable the tick box (goes blank), then press ‘Start’ to start running the
program
If a password entry is required, ensure that the password required tick box is enabled (tick visible). Press
‘Start’, then enter the password (as entered in the Security/Access/Remote User Name/Remote password
field), followed by carriage return to start running the program.
Clicking ‘Start as Lite’, allows the user to select the ‘View only’ version of Bridge. This has the advantage
of faster operation.
Bridge Configuration
Car Alarm
None
Password required Start as Lite Channel Alarm Sound Police Siren
START
Filename.uhv
Figure 6.5b Bridge icon (approximation)
The sound runs for as long as any point alarm is active and unacknowledged.
Bridge software supplies a range of sounds as listed below. In addition, eight-bit, mono, µLaw-format
.AU sound files can be imported to “<install location>\Series6000\startup\sounds”. Once a sound has
been imported, create or edit the profile (UHV) file. The new file should appear in the list. Select it and
start.
6.6 OPERATION
The up/down arrow keys allow the enabled display modes to be cycled through and the root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu allows a specific display mode to be chosen for the current group. The Home display page
can be returned-to at any time, by operating the Root Menu key followed by the Home key.
Note: Any changes to the recorder’s group configuration are reflected immediately at the
Host PC’s screen.
7 SCREEN BUILDER
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This option allows the user to create screen layouts using recorder data, simple drawing tools, text and/
or imported image files.
24 user screens are editable directly from the operator interface. A further 100 extra screens (25 to 124)
which can be created/edited etc. only via Bridge software are also available. Once created, such screens
can be copied or moved to one or more of screens 1 to 24, thus becoming accessible at the instrument’s
operator interface.
Each enabled user screen appears as a selection key in the ‘Goto View’ menu. It is therefore recom-
mended that the number of ‘Bridge Screens’ is set to the number actually needed, in order to reduce the
number of ‘More...’ operations.
Notes:
1. User screens are not supported from a PDA.
2. As a result of the way in which the screen is refreshed, unexpected results may be obtained if
any component is superimposed upon an active component, such as a bargraph or trend dis-
play.
3. The hash (#) key may not be used in text strings.
Note: Circular Trend option displays are not supported in User screens with this release of software.
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
Apply Discard
Save
Restore
See section 4.2 for
New
descriptions of other
Save/Restore functions. Text
EXPORTING SCREENS
Allows user screens to be exported to Flash memory, or disk, The operator can assign a suitable filena-
me before exporting.
The option offers two levels of sophistication - basic and advanced. The basic system defines size, posi-
tion, fill colour etc. for components (section 7.3.1). Advanced parameters allow a more sophisticated fine-
tuning of the appearance of the components
Note: X is horizontal, increasing rightwards. Y is vertical, increasing downwards. (Top left corner is
0,0)
As implied in figure 7.2.3a, screen component position and dimensions can be specified as percentage,
absolute pixels or relative pixels. Percentage is ‘percentage of screen size’. Absolute pixels allow posi-
tion and/or dimensions to be defined as an absolute number of pixels. Relative pixels are the same as
absolute pixels, except that if the display is rescaled on, say, a pc screen, the absolute pixel object will
remain unchanged, whereas the relative pixel object will scale appropriately. Similarly, for transfer from
an XGA screen recorder to a 1/4VGA recorder or vice-versa.
Draw
Component X Y Width Height
Order
Arc 0 0 10 10 10
Channel data 0 0 10 10 20
Channel horizontal bargraph 0 0 50 30 20
Channel numeric 0 0 50 20 20
Channel vertical bargraph 0 0 10 40 20
Dialogue action 0 0 10 10 10
Event Button 0 0 10 10 10
Group horizontal bargraph 0 0 50 50 30
Group horizontal trend 0 0 50 50 30
Group numeric 0 0 50 50 30
Group vertical bargraph 0 0 50 50 30
Group vertical trend 0 0 50 50 30
Image 0 0 10 10 10
Line 0 0 10 10 10
Main 0 0 100 100 1
Navigation action 0 0 10 10 10
Operator Button 0 0 10 10 10
Oval 0 0 10 10 10
Polygon 0 0 N/A N/A 10
Polyline 0 0 N/A N/A 10
Rectangle 0 0 10 10 10
Round rectangle 0 0 10 10 10
Text 0 0 0 0 20
Table 7.2.2 User screen selectable item default values
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Edit Screen
Identifier main_1.1
Component Add/Delete etc. Last Error
keys Page Title
X Position 0 %
Which keys appear at the bottom of the properties page depends on whether the user screen is being
viewed at the recorder’s user interface, or via Bridge software. Figure 7.2.3b show the recorder key ar-
rangement; figure 7.2.3c the Bridge keys. The key descriptions below are in alphabetical order, rather
than in left-right appearance order.
Goto Canvas Save Close More... Revert Discard New More... Copy Screen Move Screen More...
Close Causes the screen to quit edit mode. If there are unsaved changes the user is asked for con-
firmation.
Copy Screen Copies the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen unchanged. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before
the screen is overwritten.
Discard Causes all changes made since the last ‘Save’ to be ‘undone’
Dispose This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. When operated,
it deletes the local version of the screen, so that the display reverts to the deployed version.
Deploy This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. It causes the
screen to be saved to the PC database, and sent to the recorder.
Export This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a path name to which to Export the current screen.
Goto Canvas The Component Property Editor page disappears, and the screen is shown with the cur-
rent component highlighted. Click and Drag techniques on the highlight ‘handles’ allow the
component to be re-sized and its aspect ratio to be edited. Clicking and dragging within the
highlighted area allows the component to be moved to any position on the screen.
Selecting a component and touching the option key ‘Goto Editor’ key returns the user to the
Component Property Editor with the selected component as the current component. (Using
the Goto editor key without first highlighting a component re-opens the Component Prop-
erty Editor with ‘Main’ as the current component.)
When editing via Bridge, double clicking on a component returns to the Component Prop-
erty Editor with that component as the current component.
Import This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a User Screen for import.
More... Calls next keyset.
Move Screen Moves the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen empty. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before the
screen is overwritten.
New Allows the creation of a new (blank) screen. Current screen components are deleted (after
confirmation) leaving a blank screen. Items can be retrieved using the Revert key (above)
prior to the next ‘Save’, ‘Deploy’ or ‘Goto canvas’.
Revert Causes all changes made since the last ‘Goto canvas’ operation to be ‘undone’.
Save Causes the current screen to be saved to flash or, for Bridge operation, to the PC database.
Edit level Allows Basic or Advanced edit level to be selected for further use.
Component info on screen
Enabling this box causes a component description to appear at the top left corner
of each component. This description is in the form: Identifier(X,Y)+[∂X,∂Y], where X
and Y defines the top left corner position in pixels, and ∂X and ∂Y are the width and
height of the component in pixels. The identifier is the component name as appears
in the Identifier field of the Component Property Editor page.
Quick entry to edit If selected, this function allows direct entry from the user screen being edited to the
Component Property editor page, without the options menu first appearing offering
the choice of ‘Batch’ or ‘Edit Screen’.
If Quick entry is selected, the option menu does not appear when the option key is
touched. The Batch status page can be called by touching the ‘Page Name’ area at
the top of the screen, as an alternative to the option menu. Quick entry has no effect
on screens other than user screens.
Use Last properties If selected, then all the common attributes (e.g. position, size, colours etc.) of the
most recently edited object are applied to the next component to be added.
Positioning Grid Causes a grid to appear on the ‘Goto canvas’ screen to help in component layout
Positioning tip If enabled, then hovering over the highlighted item in a ‘goto Canvas’ screen causes
the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear, in whatever units
(%, pixels etc.) are selected for the component. The first number gives the ‘X’ (left-
right) co-ordinate; the second gives the ‘Y’ (up-down) position.
Clicking the left mouse key within a component causes the coordinates of the top left
corner of the component to appear, in whatever units (%, pixels etc.) are selected for
the component.
Clicking the left mouse key outside a component, shows the co-ordinates of the
mouse cursor tip. To see these co-ordinates within a component, the mouse must be
click-dragged from outside the component.
Y Position 0 %
Width 50 %
Height 50 %
Background Colour -1
Draw Order 30
6. Touch the Identifier field, then enter the Component Type Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
name ‘Group 1’ ‘Ok’ using the pop-up key- Goto Canvas Save Close More...
Identifier Group 1
8. Title bar is selected on (yes), as required Last Error
Group Number 1) Group 1
12 Touch the component picklist field, and Component Property Editor - Screen 1
highlight the topmost ch_hor_bar... field. Add Del Copy Paste ch_hor_bar_2.2
13. In the Identifier field, enter the name ‘Bar Identifier Bar 1
1’ using the pop-up keyboard. (To enter Last Error
Channel 1) Channel 1
numbers, touch the ‘Numeric’ tab under the
X Position 0 %
keyboard, then touch the required number.)
Y Position 0 %
14. The channel number is as required Width 100 %
15. Touch the width field and enter a value
Figure of Complete user screen
7.2.3d Height 10 %
Y Position 12 %
Width 100 %
20. Similarly configure Bar 3 and Bar 4, using
Height 10 %
the appropriate Y values (24 and 36) and Background Colour -1
Channel selection (3 and 4). Forground Colour -1
Draw Order -1
Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
21 Finally, press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’, to reveal Goto Canvas Save Close More...
Channel 1 0.4187 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 2 0.3316 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 3 0.1427 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 4 0.6293 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1 0.4187˚C
0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000 1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
Channel 1 0.4187 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 2 0.3316 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 3 0.1427 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Channel 4 0.6293 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1 0.4187˚C
0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000 1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
Identifier main_1.2
Last Error
Page Title
X Position 0 %
Y Position 0 %
Width 100 %
Height 100 %
Background Colour -1 Touch background
Draw Order 1 colour field
Component Type Main
22
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Colour list
Parameter Description
Arc Angle For Arcs only, the number of degrees of arc drawn anti-clockwise (counter-clockwise) from
the Start Angle. Negative angles draw clockwise. See figure7.4.20a for definitions.
Arc Height For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the vertical distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 3/2 times the Arc Width. The Arc height value must be less than half the Rectan-
gle height. Percent units are relative to the rectangle height, not the screen height.
Arc Width For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the horizontal distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 2/3 the Arc Height. The Arc width value must be less than half the Rectangle
width. Percent units are relative to the rectangle width, not the screen width.
Background colour The fill colour of solid objects; the background colour for the main page, trend charts, text
messages etc. For Bargraphs, the colour ‘behind’ the bar.
Button Text For operator buttons, Dialogue Action and Navigation Action. Allows button text to be
entered. Event button text is defined in Event Button Configuration, described in section
4.3.7.
Channel Allows a channel to be selected for bargraph, numeric, value etc. display.
Draw edge If set to ‘Yes’, this causes the outline shape of a solid object to be drawn in the foreground
colour. If set to ‘No’, the object’s outline is not drawn.
Draw Order Allows a layer scheme to be introduced. Items with higher draw order values are overlaid
on components with lower draw order values. The Draw Order feature is included spe-
cifically to allow a dynamic element (such as a bargraph) to be placed ‘on top of’ a back-
ground, static image. A dynamic element is always drawn on top all other elements at
update time. When one or more dynamic elements are placed on top of one another, the
results are unpredictable.
Edit Parameter For operator buttons, allows the user to select the parameter type (e.g Channel N Alarm 1)
to be edited when the button is operated. The parameter number (N) is entered in the ‘N
value’ field.
Event Button For Event buttons, this allows the user to assign an Event button to the User Screen Button
to be displayed.
Feature For ‘Channel data’ only, allows the type of data to be displayed (e.g. Current value), to be
selected from a pick-list.
Fill Area If set to ‘Yes’, this causes a solid object to be filled with the background colour. If set to
‘No’, the inside of the object is transparent. If ‘draw edge’ is also set to ‘No’, the object is
invisible.
Parameter Description
Foreground Colour The line colour of solid objects. The bar colour of bargraphs (default = normal point col-
our). The colour of Text and of numeric values. Where applicable, this overrides channel
colour.
Group number Allows a group to be selected for group trend, bargraph and numeric displays, and for
Dialogue action buttons. Select specific group, or ‘0’ to follow current display group.
Height Height of a component, measured downwards from the component’s ‘Y position’. Nega-
tive values measure upwards.
Identifier Component name. Initially as in the Add Component list, but editable by the user.
Image File Allows a file name to be entered when importing GIF or JPG images.
Last error A text message describing the last error to occur for this component. The component
must be re-edited in order to clear the problem.
N Value See ‘Edit parameter’ above.
Page Title Allows a name for the current user screen to be entered in ‘Main’. This name appears at the
top of the screen, and in the Screen number picklist for navigation action buttons.
Screen Number For navigation action buttons, allows a screen to be selected. When the button is oper-
ated, the instrument will switch to the selected display screen.
Show Title Bar When set to ‘Yes’, group displays (e.g. Group Vertical Trend) display a title bar across the
top of the component, giving the selected group’s descriptor. Selecting ‘Show Title Bar’ to
‘No’, removes the title bar from the display
Start Angle For Arcs only, defines a start point for ‘Arc Angle’ above. See figure2.4.20a for definitions.
Text Allows a text string to be entered for display at the screen. The hash (#) key may not be
used in text messages.
Width The width of a component measured rightwards from the component’s “X position’. Nega-
tive values measure leftwards.
X points Defines the X co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of Y-points
for correct interpretation
X position Distance between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of the component.
Y points Defines the Y co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of X-points
for correct interpretation
Y position Distance between the top edge of the screen and the top edge of the component.
The examples below are alternatives - only one style can be chosen for each group bargraph display.
Show Alarm Marks Yes/No Allows channel scale alarm marks to be displayed (yes) or not (no).
Alarm Marks Colour, described above, allows the user to select a
colour for the alarm marks.
Time Marker colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for time/date printing on a trend
chart
Time Marker interval Default Number of horizontal grid lines between successive time markers.
Trend Padding Default For group trend only. Normal trends are 1 pixel wide. Setting a
padding value of N, adds N pixels on each side of the central pixel.
For example, a padding value of 2 would produce traces 5 pixels
wide. Applies to all channels in the group.
Units Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, then Units Font allows the Channel Units font to be selected
from a picklist.
Update when Value changes Action is taken when the value associated with the component changes
Always The component is redrawn, continuously, at the display update rate.
Vertical alignment Centred/bottom/top Allows text to be positioned relative to its height setting
Value Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, then Value Font allows the Channel Value font to be selected
from a picklist.
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 5 of 6)
The recorder attempts to fit as many channel bars as possible into the width of the display. The default
minimum width of a column is 6 mm. If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display, a
scroll bar device appears at the bottom edge to allow ‘hidden’ bars to be accessed.
The recorder attempts to fit as many faceplates as possible into the height of the display. If there are
more faceplates than can be fitted into the display, a scroll bar device appears to allow ‘hidden’ face-
plates to be accessed.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display,
a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm.). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the dis-
play, a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
For Batch and Operator Note use, a Group number can be selected.
In all the above, N represents any number between 1 and the maximum number available for the relevant
type of point. (Point is an umbrella term for an input channel, a maths channel, a totaliser, etc.)
When the button is operated a ‘confirmation’ page appears allowing, for example, the value of a con-
stant to be edited before operating the ‘Apply’ button.
Notes:
1 If the point being accessed is not suitably configured, the ‘confirmation’ page is blank. For
example, if the Operator button is configured to change, say, the threshold (SP) of Alarm 2 on
Channel 6, and either Channel 6 is Configured ‘Off’, or alarm 2 is ‘Off’, then the Confirmation
page will not have a configurable area allowing the user to enter the required new value.
2. Any signing or authorizing that normally applies to the item being edited, also applies when
changes are being made by means of the Operator button.
Ack Alarms
Figure 7.4.11 Typical Event Button
7.4.12 Image
This allows a GIF (Gif87a format only) or JPG image file to be loaded from (e.g.) an SD or Flash card. Once
this has been done, bargraphs, text messages etc. can be superimposed on the image.
Notes:
1 Only user screens 1 to 6, may have images embedded in them, and the size of each image may
not exceed 250kB (see also note 3). Does not apply to Bridge-only screens (25 to 124).
2. It is recommended that ‘abs_pxl’ be selected as width and height units, before an image is
loaded. The use of any other units significantly increases the time taken for the loading process
to complete.
3. For user screens 1 to 6, the physical size of the image may not exceed 1024 pixels wide or 768
high. Any attempt to load am image larger than this results in a ‘User Screen Image Error’ mes-
sage asking that the image size be reduced. The size constraint does not apply to Bridge-only
screens (25 to 124).
7.4.13 Text
If width and height are left with the default values of zero, the text will start at the specified start point
and fit in the space between there and the right edge of the screen, in a single line (left justified (ranged)
as a default). If the text string is too long, it is truncated. The text appears in the specified foreground
colour, superimposed on a ‘box’ of background colour which is the same width of the text string.
If width and height are defined, then the text will fill the defined width and any remaining text is truncat-
ed. The text appears in the foreground colour (default black), over a field of background colour (default
grey).
Advanced properties allow the text to be set to range left, range right or be centred, at the top, bottom
or centre of the field, and for the foreground and background colours to be swapped.
Note: The rounded rectangle will draw incorrectly if either of the arc height/width settings are
greater than half the rectangle height/width settings.
X Position 1/2 Arc width
Height
Width
Figure 7.4.14 Round rectangle definitions
7.4.15 Rectangle
This draws a rectangle on the display page. If the height and width of the rectangle are defined in the
default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values for height and width will result in a rectangle with
the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a square as might be expected. Because the screen
height is approximately 2/3 the width, the rectangle height should be 3/2 the rectangle width to pro-
duce a square. (The actual height/width ratio is 535/800 = 0.669 for large frame units or 214/320 = 0.669
for small frame units).
Using pixels as the measuring units obviates this problem as pixels are square.
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only
2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item.
Example: To draw an (old fashioned) electronic resistor icon (Units = Absolute pixels)
X position = 400, Y position = 236,
Foreground colour = 0
X points = 0,10,15,25,35,45,55,65,75,85,90,100
Y points = 0,0,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,0,0
Press ‘Apply’, then ‘Close’ to produce a red ‘sawtooth’ outline, as depicted in figure 7.4.16 below.
Point1 Point 12
X=0; y=0 X=100; y=0
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units
are only 2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item
Example: To draw a left pointing solid arrow, positioned with its point at the centre of the screen.
Access the component page as described in section 7.2.3, select ‘polygon - closed area’ and press Ok. In
the properties page, carry out the following configuration (units = %):
X position = 50, Y position = 50,
Background colour = 22, Foreground colour = 30
Draw edge = Yes, Fill area = Yes
X points = 0,10,10,30,30,10,10
Y points = 0, -15, -5, -5, 5, 5, 15
Press Apply, then Close to produce a dark green arrow, with pale green outline, as depicted in figure
7.4.17 below.
Point 2
X=10; y=-15
Point 3
X=10; y=-5 Point 4
X=30; y=-5
Point 1
X= 0; y= 0
Point 5
Point 6 X=30; y= 5
X=10; y= 5
Point 7
X=10; y= 15
7.4.18 Oval
Similar to an arc (section 7.4.20) with an arc angle of 360 degrees, but arcs cannot be filled,
If the height and width of the oval are defined in the default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values
for height and width will result in an oval with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a circle as
might be expected. Because the screen height is approximately 2/3 the width, the oval height should
be 3/2 its width to produce a circle. (The actual height/width ratio = 0.669).
7.4.19 Line
This causes a straight line of user-definable thickness to be drawn between the points (X position; Y posi-
tion) and (X position + width; Y position + height)
Notes:
1 Y increases downwards; X increases rightwards
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
X position;
Y position
Height
Width
X position + width;
Y position + height
Figure 7.4.19a Line definitions
EXAMPLE
To draw an approximation to a St.Andrew’s cross (saltire):
Select Advanced Edit level, then in the component property editor page
1. touch the ‘Add’ key at the top of the screen. In the ‘List of Component types’ page, press ‘Line’, ‘Add’,
‘Line’, ‘Add’, then ‘Close’
2. In ‘main_1.2’ - set background colour to 6
4. In ‘line_2.3’ Set Width to 100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35
5. In ‘line_3.4’ - Set X position to 100, Width to -100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and
Line thickness to 35
6. Press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’.
Note: because of the thickness of the lines takes the corners beyond the display area, an error
message may appear in the ‘Last error’ field for the lines : position maybe out of bounds. This
should not prevent the screen being drawn correctly.
7.4.20 Arc
This causes a curved line of user-definable thickness to be drawn anti-clockwise between start angle
and (start angle + arc angle). The origin (‘centre’) of the arc is (X position + 1/2 Width) ; (Y position + 1/2
Height). Arcs cannot be filled.
Notes:
1 Angle increases anticlockwise
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
3 Arcs cannot be filled - the shading in the figure is included for clarity only
X/Y Position
Arc end point
1/2 Height
Arc Start point
= Start angle
= Arc angle
1/2 Width
EXAMPLE
An arc definition of:
X position = 50%, Y position = 50%, Width = 50%, Height = 50%, Start angle = 0; Arc angle 270 would
produce the curve depicted in figure 7.4.20b, below.
Group 1 • User Screen 1 14:24:31
Engineer 22/08/05
Batch Number:050822.010
X position;
y position Width
Height
Start of arc
End of arc
Thus, horizontally,
10 mm = 10% = 32 pixels
or 1% = 1 mm = 3.2 pixels
or 10 pixels = 3.2 mm
and Vertically,
10 mm = 13% = 29 pixels
or 1% = 0.72 mm = 2.4 pixels
or 10 pixels = 3.4 mm
8.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45
connector at the rear of the recorder either:
1. Directly to a host computer, using a crossover cable
2. To a host computer via a network, using a ‘straight through’ cable.
8.2 INTRODUCTION
MODBUS TCP allows one or more recorders to act as ‘slave’ devices to one or more host computers con-
nected via the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each recorder must have a unique Internet
Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in Section 4.5.
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications
protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of
MODBUS messaging in an intranet or internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MOD-
BUS detail in this manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at http://www.modbus.
org/default.htm The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in
one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16 bit) registers that can be
accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is
127/2 = 63.
DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
DATA ENCODING
MODBUS uses what is called a ‘Big endian’ representation for addresses and data items. This means that when
a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For example
a 32-bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and finally 78.
8.2.4 Security
The recorder has a local file in which are stored all users’ login information, as set up in Security/Access
configuration (section 4.4) it must then supply the correct Username and Password. Should a host fail to
login after three attempts, the recorder will terminate the connection.
This MODBUS security function can be enabled/disabled in the Operator/Config/Instrument menu (sec-
tion 4.3.1).
Note: Modbus Security must be disabled in order for Modbus communications to be established.
Once the Master is communicating with the Slave, Modbus security can be re-enabled, providing
that the master has the correct remote user name and password data for the relevant slave. If this
information is missing, all read/write requests will be ignored by the slave.
(Continued)
Figure 8.2.4a shows data transmission sequence for sending a login request to a recorder with Modbus
address 1, using the Ethernet network connection. Figure 8.2.4b is the same message for use with serial
communications.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 13 01 10 CC 30 00 06
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Start Start No. of regis- No. of reg-
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function address address low ters high isters low
lowing (hex) address code (hex) high
Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23
0C 45 6E 67 69 6E 65 65 72 00 HH HH
Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password
E (Hex) n (Hex) g (Hex) i (Hex) n (Hex) e (Hex) e (Hex) r (Hex) High Low
Byte Byte
User name (as configured in instrument. Must be followed by null character (Hex 00)
Byte 24
00 Null character inserted only, if
otherwise, the Byte count in
Null
Byte 12 would be Odd.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 10 CC 30 00 06 0C 45 6E 67 69 6E
Slave MODBUS Start Start No. of regis- No. of reg- Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
identifier function address address low ters high isters low (excluding E (Hex) n (Hex) g (Hex) i (Hex) n (Hex)
high CRC)
code (hex)
Notes:
1 The high and low password bytes are entered using the result of the encryption program
above. If the password is blank, both High and Low Bytes must be 00 (null).
2 For successful login, the ‘Connect from remote’ item must be enabled (ref. ‘Access levels in sec-
tion 4.4.1).
Response
Figures 8.2.4c and 8.2.4d show response messages for successful and non-successful login attempts.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 10 CC 30 00 05
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Start Start No. of regis-No. of regis-
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function Address Address ters high ters low
lowing (hex) address code (hex) high low
If ‘text length’ is non-zero, the host must access the parameter ‘Read Text’ (also in group data) to read the
message, and it must also reset the ‘Text Length’ parameter to zero. This causes the recorder to look for
any further messages in the queue, and if there are, it will load the latest message into the area accessed
by ‘Read Data’, and then set ‘Text Length’ to the length of the new message. If the host fails to set Text
Length to zero after reading a message, no new messages will be read.
If ‘Text Length’ is zero, no new messages have been generated since the last poll.
LONG MESSAGES
All messages are terminated with a null character.
Messages of up to 60 characters (including the time and date and the terminating ‘null’) can be read by
the master device in a single transaction.
If the message contains more than 60 characters, one or more continuation messages of up to 60 char-
acters each are placed in ‘Read Text’, as soon as the previous message has been confirmed as ‘read’. The
master can continue to read all these messages, until it detects a ‘null’ character. Intelligent masters can
then re-assemble the characters into a single message. Non-intelligent masters can treat the continua-
tion messages as separate messages sent at the same time as the first message.
Notes:
1. If any of the messages is of less than 60 characters, the unused part of message is filled with
‘null’ characters (example 1). Thus, by reading character 60, the master can determine either
that this is the last message (character 60 = ‘null’), or that there is at least one message to follow
(character 60 is not ‘null’).
2. Continuation messages cannot contain only null characters. For this reason, if the message it-
self (i.e. excluding final ‘null’ characters) is exactly 60 characters long (or a multiple of 60 charac-
ters long) then the final extension message contains a space, followed by 59 ‘nulls’ (Example 2).
3. Time and date appear only in the main message, not the continuation message(s).
Example 1
Example 2
message
(Space + 59 null
characters) 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Extension i ne 3 s e c t i on 1 7
message
69 6E 65 20 33 20 73 65 63 74 69 6F 6E 20 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
FFF4
Addresses FFF0 to FFF4: Permanent ID table e rN io n run-time data
FFF0 h t
FFEF
Addresses FD08 to FFEF: Spare Et Op
FD08
FD07
Addresses FC47 to FCBE: Counters
FCBF
Addresses FCBF to FD07: EtherNet/IP Addresses FB7F to FC46: Totalisers
FCBE Addresses F8C3 to FCBE: Run-time data 32-bit
F8C3 IEEE Region (32-bit data access area) run-time Addresses F9EF to FB7E: Maths
F8C2
data
Addresses F8C3 to F9EE:
Addresses D4E7 to F8C2: Point configuration data Input channels
IEEE Region (32-bit data access area)
Addresses F48B to F8C2: Counters
D4E7
D4E6
32-bit
D0E6 Addresses D0E6 to D4E6: R/W Indirection table config. Addresses ED83 to F48A: Totalisers
D0E5
CCE5 Addresses CCE5 to D0E5: R/O Indirection table data
CCE4
CC26 Addresses CC26 to CCE4: Feature ID table
CC25
Addresses DF73 to ED82: Maths
Addresses A4D6 to CC25:
Notes:
1 All addresses in hexadecimal
2 Areas represent relative sizes, but are not to scale
For example, if a group has channels 1 to 6, maths channel 1 and totaliser three fitted, the results would be:
Register 1 = 63 (32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1) (channels 1 to 6)
Register 5 = 2048 (maths channel 1)
Register 12 = 2 (Totaliser 1)
All other register values = 0
Value if
16384
32768
1024
2048
4096
8192
128
256
512
bit set
16
32
64
1
8
Bit number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
4 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
5 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
6 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21
Register Number
7 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37
8 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53
9 M54 M55 M56 M57 M58 M59 M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68 M69
10 M70 M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 M76 M77 M78 M79 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85
11 M86 M87 M88 M89 M90 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 T1
12 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17
13 T18 T19 T20 T21 T22 T23 T24 T25 T26 T27 T28 T29 T30 T31 T32 T33
14 T34 T35 T36 T37 T38 T39 T40 T41 T42 T43 T44 T45 T46 T47 T48 T49
15 T50 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15
16 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30
Note: When reading a Process Variable (PV) values, as ‘scaled’ integers the position of the decimal
point is set by the ‘Max. Decimal Digits’ parameter in the relevant Channel’s Configuration. Only if
the resulting value can be represented within 16 bit resolution (±32767), will the value be transmit-
ted accurately. For example, a value of 12.3456 needs more than 16-bit resolution, and the trans-
mitted value would be the maximum value of 32767 (over range). Reducing the number of decimal
places to three, for example (12.345) allows the value to be encoded as a 16-bit value which can be
transmitted accurately.
Generally: channel N parameter address = channel 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 007B (123) 1
Ch1 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 007C (124) 1
Ch1 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 007D (125) 1
Ch1 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 007E (126) 1
Ch1 PV type Input type Enum Read only 007F (127) 1
1 = Analogue input 3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths 4 = Counter
Ch1 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 0080 (128) 1
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch1 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 0081 (129) 1
Ch1 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 0082 (130) 3
Spare 0085 (133) 2
Ch1 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 0087 (135) 4
Spare 008B (139) 4
Ch1 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 008F (143) 4
Spare 0093 (147) 4
Ch1 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 0097 (151) 10
Spare 00A1 (161) 10
Ch1 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 00AB (171) 1
Ch1 PV format Enum Read only 00AC (172) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 00AD (173) 60
Ch1 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 00E9 (233) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched 3 = Trigger
Ch1 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 00EA (234) 1
0 = Absolute low 1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in 3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise 5 = Rate of change fall
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 00EB (235) 1
Spare 00EC (236) 10
Ch1 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 00F6 (246) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 00F7 (247) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 00F8 (248) 1
Spare 00F9 (249) 10
Ch1 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 0103 (259) 1
Ch1 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 0104 (260) 1
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 0105 (261) 1
Spare 0106 (262) 10
Ch1 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 0110 (272) 1
Ch1 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 0111 (273) 1
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 0112 (274) 1
Spare 0113 (275) 10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1D9 (41433) 1
Ch1 status Channel status Enum Read only A1DA (41434) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1DB (41435) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 2
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch2 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1DC (41436) 1
Ch2 status Channel status Enum Read only A1DD (41437) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch2 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1DE (41438) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 4
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch4 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1E2 (41442) 1
Ch4 status Channel status Enum Read only A1E3 (41443) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch4 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1E4 (41444) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 6
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch6 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1E8 (41448) 1
Ch6 status Channel status Enum Read only A1E9 (41449) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch6 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1EA (41450) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 8
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch8 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1EE (41454) 1
Ch8 status Channel status Enum Read only A1EF (41455) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch8 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1F0 (41456) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 10
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch10 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1F4 (41460) 1
Ch10 status Channel status Enum Read only A1F5 (41461) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch10 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1F6 (41462) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 12
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch12 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1FA (41466) 1
Ch12 status Channel status Enum Read only A1FB (41467) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch12 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1FC (41468) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
GROUP 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Grp1 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only A4D6 (42198) 1
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp1 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only A4D7 (42199) 2
Grp1 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only A4D9 (42201) 2
Grp1 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only A4DB (42203) 10
Spare A4E5 (42213) 10
Grp1 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows: (16)
Register 1 Uint16 Read only A4EF (42223) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15: 0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only A4F0 (42224) 1
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48 Uint16 Read only A4F1 (42225) 1
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64 Uint16 Read only A4F2 (42226) 1
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80 Uint16 Read only A4F3 (42227) 1
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only A4F4 (42228) 1
See table 8.3 Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only A4F5 (42229) 1
for point types Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only A4F6 (42230) 1
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144 Uint16 Read only A4F7 (42231) 1
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160 Uint16 Read only A4F8 (42232) 1
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176 Uint16 Read only A4F9 (42233) 1
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192 Uint16 Read only A4FA (42234) 1
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208 Uint16 Read only A4FB (42235) 1
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224 Uint16 Read only A4FC (42236) 1
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240 Uint16 Read only A4FD (42237) 1
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256 Uint16 Read only A4FE (42238) 1
Grp1 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write A4FF (42239) 1
Grp1 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only A500 (42240) 4
Grp1 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only A504 (42244) 30
Reserved A522 (42274) 30
Grp1 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only A540 (42304) 30
Reserved A55E (42334) 30
Grp1 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only A57C (42364) 1
Grp1 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only A57D (42365) 1
Grp1 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only A57E (42366) 1
Grp1 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A57F (42367) 30
Reserved A59D (42397) 30
Grp1 Text field 2 Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A5BB (42427) 30
Reserved A5D9 (42457) 30
Grp1 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A5F7 (42487) 30
Reserved A615 (42517) 30
Grp1 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A633 (42547) 30
Reserved A651 (42577) 30
Grp1 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A66F (42607) 30
Reserved A68D (42637) 30
Grp1 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A6AB (42667) 30
Reserved A6C9 (42697) 30
Spare A6E7 (42727) 100
Two configurable tables are available, one for read only parameters, the other for read/write. Each table
is in two halves - the lower address half contains the addresses of the registers to be accessed; the higher
address half contains the values which have been read or which are to be written.
Notes:
1. For Ethernet connections, indirection table entries are lost at power off, as the result of a
brown-out or if the connection with the host is broken.
2. Parameters in IEEE format can be accessed by configuring two successive entries in the table.
Parameters which occupy more than one register can be loaded into the indirection area by
using function code 16 (pre-set multiple registers) and the parameter’s base address (i.e. the
parameter’s 1st register).
3. Separate indirection table entries are held for each host - the recorder automatically switches
each host to its own indirection table without user intervention.
4. Indirection table addresses (CCE5 to D4E7) cannot be entered in the indirection tables. Any
attempt to do so will be ignored.
D4E6
Read/Write
data area
Read/Write
indirection
area
D0E7
D0E6 No. of R/W entries
D0E5
Read only
data area
Read only area
CEE6
CEE5
Read only
indirection
area
CCE6
CCE5 No. of Read Only entries
Table 8.4.6a Indirection table areas
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only D4E7 (54503) 2
Ch1 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D4E9 (54505) 2
Ch1 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D4EB (54507) 2
Ch1 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D4ED (54509) 2
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4EF (54511) 2
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4F1 (54513) 2
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4F3 (54515) 2
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4F5 (54517) 2
Spare D4F7 (54519) 20
CHANNEL 2
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch2 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D50B (54539) 2
Ch2 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D50D (54541) 2
Ch2 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D50F (54543) 2
Ch2 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D511 (54545) 2
Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D513 (54547) 2
Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D515 (54549) 2
Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D517 (54551) 2
Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D519 (54553) 2
Spare D51B (54555) 20
CHANNEL 3
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch3 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D52F (54575) 2
Ch3 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D531 (54577) 2
Ch3 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D533 (54579) 2
Ch3 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D535 (54581) 2
Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D537 (54583) 2
Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D539 (54585) 2
Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D53B (54587) 2
Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D53D (54589) 2
Spare D53F (54591) 20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
CHANNEL 5
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch5 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D577 (54647) 2
Ch5 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D569 (54649) 2
Ch5 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D57B (54651) 2
Ch5 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D57D (54653) 2
Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D57F (54655) 2
Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D581 (54657) 2
Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D583 (54659) 2
Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D585 (54661) 2
Spare D587 (54663) 20
CHANNEL 6
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch6 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D59B (54683) 2
Ch6 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D59D (54685) 2
Ch6 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D59F (54687) 2
Ch6 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5A1 (54689) 2
Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5A3 (54691) 2
Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5A5 (54693) 2
Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5A7 (54695) 2
Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5A9 (54697) 2
Spare D5AB (54699) 20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
CHANNEL 8
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch8 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D5E3 (54755) 2
Ch8 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D5E5 (54757) 2
Ch8 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5E7 (54759) 2
Ch8 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5E9 (54761) 2
Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5EB (54763) 2
Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5ED (54765) 2
Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5EF (54767) 2
Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5F1 (54769) 2
Spare D5F3 (54771) 20
CHANNEL 9
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch9 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D607 (54791) 2
Ch9 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D609 (54793) 2
Ch9 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D60B (54795) 2
Ch9 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D60D (54797) 2
Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D60F (54799) 2
Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D611 (54801) 2
Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D613 (54803) 2
Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D615 (54805) 2
Spare D617 (54807) 20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
CHANNEL 11
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch11 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D64F (54863) 2
Ch11 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D651 (54865) 2
Ch11 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D653 (54867) 2
Ch11 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D655 (54869) 2
Ch11 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D657 (54871) 2
Ch11 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D659 (54873) 2
Ch11 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D65B (54875) 2
Ch11 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D65D (54877) 2
Spare D65F (54879) 20
CHANNEL 12
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch12 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D673 (54899) 2
Ch12 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D675 (54901) 2
Ch12 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D677 (54903) 2
Ch12 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D679 (54905) 2
Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D67B (54907) 2
Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D67D (54909) 2
Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D67F (54911) 2
Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D681 (54913) 2
Spare D683 (54915) 20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 1 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8C3 (63683) 2
Channel 1 status Channel status Enum Read only F8C5 (63685) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8C6 (63686) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 2
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 2 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8C7 (63687) 2
Channel 2 status Channel status Enum Read only F8C9 (63689) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 2 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8CA (63690) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 4
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 4 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8CF (63695) 2
Channel 4 status Channel status Enum Read only F8D1 (63697) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 4 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8D2 (63698) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 6
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 6 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8D7 (63703) 2
Channel 6 status Channel status Enum Read only F8D9 (63705) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 6 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8DA (63706) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 8
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 8 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8DF (63711) 2
Channel 8 status Channel status Enum Read only F8E1 (63713) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 8 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8E2 (63714) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 10
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 10 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8E7 (63719) 2
Channel 10 status Channel status Enum Read only F8E9 (63721) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 10 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8EA (63722) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
CHANNEL 12
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Channel 12 value Current process value (PV) Float See note 1 F8EF (63727) 2
Channel 12 status Channel status Enum Read only F8F1 (63729) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Channel 12 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8F2 (63730) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Read/Write
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Read/Write
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active Read only
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Read/Write
Bit 15: Spare
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Bytes 8 onwards
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Number of Recorder Modbus Data
identifier identifier identifier identifier Always 00 bytes fol- Modbus function (Depends on
(usually 00) (usually 00) (00) (00) lowing address code (hex) function code)
Notes:
1 The transaction identifier has no active function - the recorder just copies the bytes from the
request message to the response message.
2. The protocol identifier bytes are always zero.
FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES
Refer to section 8.2.1 for lists of function codes and exception codes supported.
TEXT STRINGS
When sending text strings, such as Batch fields, the final character must be followed by one or two ‘Null’
characters. The number of bytes in the text string (including the null) must be even, even if this means
adding two nulls at the end of the message instead of one.
where each pair of characters occupies on 16-bit word. Similarly, the text string ‘Batch Number:’ would be
sent as
Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er :null,
but only one Null character is required to provide an even number of bytes.
Thus to read Channel 5 descriptor (start address 031F - 10 registers altogether) the following request (as
described in figure 8.5.1a) would be transmitted for a recorder with a Modbus address of 1:
0000000000060103031F000A
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 03 1F 00 0A
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Register Register Word count Word count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function start start high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) address address
high byte low byte
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a similar message, but the function code (03) is followed by:
Byte count (= 2 x the number of register values requested) in hex (1 byte)
Value of register at start address (2 bytes)
Value of register at start address + 1 (2 bytes)
etc.
etc.
Value of final register (2 bytes)
Thus as a response to the above request for channel 5 descriptor, the following message (as expanded
in figure 8.5.1b) would be returned to the host (assuming channel descriptor to be: Channel 5 Descriptor
and Modbus address = 1):
0000000000170103144368616E6E656C20352044657363726970746F72
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 17 01 03 14 43 68 61
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function (No of reg- C (Hex) h (Hex) a (Hex)
lowing (hex) address code (hex) isters x 2)
(Hex)
Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23
6E 6E 65 6C 20 35 20 44 65 73 63 72
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
n (Hex) n (Hex) e (Hex) l (Hex) space (Hex) 5 (Hex) space (Hex) D (Hex) e (Hex) s (Hex) c (Hex) r (Hex)
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 83 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Byte 1 = Exception code 01 (Illegal function) or 02 (Invalid data address)
Thus to write a value of 80 degrees as Alarm 1 setpoint for channel 3 (register address 022F), the follow-
ing request (as detailed in figure 8.5.3) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000060106022F0050
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 06 02 2F 00 50
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MOodbus Register Register Value Value
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function start start high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) address address
(hex) (hex)
high byte low byte
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a message identical with the request message.
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 86 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Thus to initiate a loopback test (using, as an example, ‘P’ ’Q’ as the query data), the following request (as
detailed in figure 8.5.4) is transmitted to the recorder:
000000000006010800005051
The response to the receipt of such a message should be to ‘echo’ the request back to the host.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 08 00 00 50 51
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Subfunction Subfunction Query data Query data
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function code code high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) high byte low byte (ASCII 'P') (ASCII 'Q')
(Hex) (Hex)
Thus to write ”Batch Number” as batch field 1 for group 1 (start address A57F), the following message
(expanded in figure 8.5.5a) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000150110A57F00070E4261746368204E756D6265720000
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12
00 00 00 00 00 15 01 10 A5 7F 00 07 0E
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Base Base Word count Word count
Byte count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes to fol- Modbus function address address High byte Low byte
low (hex) address code (hex) High byte Low byte
Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26
42 61 74 63 68 20 4E 75 6D 62 65 72 00 00
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
B (Hex) a (Hex) t (Hex) c (Hex) h (Hex) space (Hex) N (Hex) u (Hex) m (Hex) b (Hex) e (Hex) r (Hex) Null Null
RESPONSE
The response message (detailed in figure 8.5.5b) after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5, above is:
Function code 10 (1 byte)
Start address (2 bytes)
Word count (2 bytes)
Thus, the response to the above batch field request would be:
0000000000060110A57F0007
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 10 A5 7F 00 07
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Base Base Word count Word count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function address address High byte Low byte
lowing (hex) Address code (hex) High byte Low byte
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 90 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Note: Function code 16 can be used to write multiple registers into the indirection table area, for
example, by writing the base register address of a 32-bit channel value (e.g. channel 3 - start ad-
dress: F994) into location D18B.
9.2 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A for the analogue output board specification.
9.3 CONFIGURATION
See section 4.3.17 (output channel configuration) for details.
Note: 10% and 90% of output range are commonly used as low and high values respectively.
Clock
Locale
Upgrade
Input Adjust
Output adjust
Channel 4
Adjust Channel
Remove Adjust Specify the low output and then the low reading
Apply Discard
10.1 INTRODUCTION
Each Event input option board offers six isolated input circuits. Inputs can be either switch closures or
voltage levels.
Section 4.3.6 (Event configuration) describes the use of events and how they can be combined to per-
form logic functions, if required. Job lists can be triggered by any event, either internal or as a result of
external events wired to an event input board.
If this option is fitted, ‘Event input board’ appears as a event source, and the user must then specify a
board number and associated input number as required.
10.3 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A
11.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
Transmitter power supplies must not be used with dc supply voltages.
Notes:
1. Transmitter power supplies are not suitable for use with dc or low-voltage ac supplies.
2 The transmitter power supply is available only with 100 mm. recorders.
This option consists of a circuit board, terminal block and suitable wiring inside a long terminal cover at
the rear of a 100mm recorder. The board supplies three mutually isolated dc supplies (nominal 25 Volts)
each of which is intended to power a single 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA current loop.
11.2 FUSING
Access to the output wiring and to the fuse is achieved by isolating the recorder from mains power and
opening the terminal cover (after removing its securing screws). The process is fully described below.
Recorder
Body Connector
clip access
4 The fuse is located as shown in figure 11.2.2c. User wiring to the terminal block (figures 11.2.3a/b)
can be carried out now, or the terminal cover can be removed for convenience, as described in steps
5 onwards below.
Power cord
to recorder
User terminal
block
Fuse
Note: Four apertures in each side of the terminal cover allow the user to actuate the clips which
secure the i/o connectors to the rear panel of the recorder. This allows the i/o connectors to be re-
moved if, for example, the recorder is to be removed from the panel for any reason. The positions
of these apertures are shown in figure 11.2.2b (right-hand side shown; left-hand side similar).
Recorder rear
terminal panel
Transmitter Power Supply
Channel input
100W 250W PCB
0 mA 0V 0V V+ V- I
4 mA 0.4 V 1.0 V
R
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
20 mA 2.0 V 5.0V
Voltages generated by
various currents for
R = 100W and R =250W
User terminal block
– + – + – +
- + Other transmitters
12.1 INTRODUCTION
If the Serial Communications option is fitted, this allows the printing of messages, as and when they
occur, or the printing of configurable reports as a result of job action. The recorder is set up to drive a
number of recommended printers. As more printers become available, printer drivers can be imported
as described in section 12.4, below. For printer specification, refer to the documentation supplied with
the printer.
12.2 WIRING
1 5
6 9
Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2
View on solder-bucket face
of user socket
EIA232C
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 Rx
3 Tx
4 DTR
5 Signal ground
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 5V via 1500Ω
Figure 12.2.1a Serial port locations (small frame) Figure 12.2.1b Serial port pinout
12.2.2 DC connection
Pin Function
1
3 1 +24V±10%
+24V NC 2 0V
3 Not connected
0V 2
Shell Chassis ground
12.3 CONFIGURATION
Configuration takes place in two areas viz: ‘Connections’ and ‘Reports’ (section 12.3.2).
12.3.1 Connections
Figure 12.3.1a shows the default configuration page for ASCII printer protocol. See section 4.3.15 for
other protocols.
Port Serial 1
Online
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Parity Even
Printer Type Star TSP600 Select printer type
Printer Test
PORT
This allows serial port 1 or serial port 2 to be selected for printer configuration. Separate, independently
configurable printers can be connected to the two ports, or, if only one printer is to be connected, any of
the other available protocols can be selected for the non-printer port.
Note: For instruments fitted with two printers, the count relates to the currently selected printer.
BAUD RATE
Select Baud Rate setting to match that set at the Printer.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. For reliable communications with the
printer, it is recommended that the default parity be used.
PRINTER TYPE
Allows a printer driver to be selected for the printer connected to this port.
PRINTER NAME
Allows a name to be entered for the printer.
PRINTER STATUS
Not Responding Printer is not communicating - check wiring
OK Printer is connected and working correctly
Paper Low The printer paper is getting low. The roll should be replaced as soon as possible
Paper Out The printer paper roll is exhausted.
Unknown error Printer is not working correctly - perhaps an unknown type of printer has been at-
tached.
PRINTER TEST
Operating this button causes a test printout to appear at the
printer, as shown in figure 12.3.1b.
MESSAGES TO PRINT
Figure 12.3.1b Test printout
This set of enable boxes allows the user to select which, if any,
messages will be printed. Enable boxes appear even if the
relevant option is not fitted.
Messages are printed as they arise, but reports take precedence. For example, if a report is to be printed
when channel one goes into alarm, and ‘Alarms’ is enabled in the ‘Messages To Print’ area, then the Re-
port is printed before the alarm message.
Note: Messages will be printed only if they are enabled in the relevant part of the recorder’s
configuration. For example: ‘Logins’ messages will be printed only if ‘Record Logins’ is enabled in
the unit’s ‘Security’ configuration (section 4.4), and ‘Alarms’ messages will be printed only if ‘Alarm
Message’ and/or ‘Ack Message’ are enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2).
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Field 1 Type Date & Time
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply Discard
REPORT
Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration.
DESCRIPTOR
A name for the Report can be entered here.
NUMBER OF FIELDS
Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report.
FIELD N TYPE
N = 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item.
Date & Time Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the report
Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters.
Process value Allows a specified point’s process value (including descriptor and units) to be includ-
ed in the report
Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report. See section 4.3.10 for Batch details.
Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report. See section 4.3.8 for details
of message configuration.
Line Feed Allows one or more blank lines to be left. This can be useful at the end of a report.
POINT
Allows a point to be chosen when ‘Process value’ has been selected as Field Type. The point is selected
from a pick-list containing all the input channels, derived channels, totalisers etc. in the instrument.
LINE FEED
Appears only when ‘Line Feed’ has been chosen as Field Type. Allows the user to enter the required
number of blank lines (up to 10) which are to be inserted.
When using a PC as the operator interface, the detailed appearance of the Host PC browse window de-
pends on the Windows version in use.
Save
Restore
New
Text
Import Screen
Export Screen
Import User Linearisation
Export User Linearisation
Import Printer Driver
Import
\user\ Hide
The report is to include the process values of channels 1 to 4 and the time and date.
Note: The example assumes that the channels being configured are in their factory default state.
Configuration items not mentioned in the example (e.g. Scale Low) should be left at their default
values.
GROUP NUMBER 1
Descriptor = Colour mix.
Alarm message = Disable
Deselect all points except Channels 1 to 4.
CHANNEL 1
Input Type = Test
Scale High =100
Units = %
Descriptor = Red
Alarm 1
Enable = Unlatched
Type = Absolute low
Threshold = 10
CHANNEL 2
As channel 1, except
Descriptor = Blue
CHANNEL 3
As channel 1, except
Descriptor = Green
CHANNEL 4
As channel 1, except
Waveform = Sine 4 minutes
Descriptor = Orange
EVENT NUMBER 1
Source 1 = Unack’d Alarm on Group
Descriptor = Paint low
Job number 1
Category = Report
Send Report to = Select required printer
Report = 1) report 1
On = Active
Press ‘Apply’.
A sample Printout is shown in figure 12.5.5, in which it can be seen that it was the Orange channel which
triggered the warning.
Note: In the example above the event trigger is ‘Unacknowledged alarm’. This means that once
the first channel alarm becomes active and the relevant report printed, then no further reports will
be initiated until the alarm is acknowledged, no matter how many other channel alarms go active.
If, however, an unlatched alarm becomes inactive, this is the equivalent of its being acknowledged
as far as report printing is concerned. For latched alarms, each alarm must be acknowledged
before further reports can be triggered.
The DIP switches are revealed by removing the access panel located on the underside of the printer.
The two switches appear as shown in figure 12.6a, and their elements should be configured as shown in
figure 12.6b. See SW1/SW2 details in the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for details.
DSW1 DSW2
DSW1 DSW2
Figure 12.6a DIP switch access Figure 12.6b DIP switch element configuration
DSW3
The illustrated switch settings (segments 4, 5 and 6 ‘Off’; all other segments ‘On’) give the following pa-
rameter values: Baud Rate = 9600, Data bits = 8, Parity = Even, Handshake = Xon/Xoff.
Settings other than these may result in no communications or unreliable communications with the printer.
See the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for more details of SW3.
The various options described below come provided in a rugged carrying case as depicted in figure 13,
below,
It is possible that input/output circuits can carry high voltages, and this might prove dangerous if the
safety earth connection to the recorder is not in place (e.g. the plug is pulled out) at any time whilst such
hazardous voltages are present. Therefore, the following warning must be complied with:
WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (i.e. maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, 70V dc) unless the
integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the recorder.
430 mm
190 mm 384.8 mm
40.5 mm
240 mm 15 mm
300 mm
Top view
174
mm
38
mm
13.1.1 Introduction
The basic portable case option provides 6 or 12 input channels with up to four option boards, or 18 input
channels and up to two option boards.
13.1.2 Wiring
Figure 13.1.2a, below, gives alternative back panel connector layouts for the 12-input and 18-input re-
corder options.
1 22 1 22
Option board 3 Option board 4 Ch13 Ch14 Ch15 Ch16 Ch17 Ch18
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + –
22 1 22
Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12 Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
1 22 1 22
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
1 22 1 22
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.1.2a, above, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conduc-
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Input and typical options pinouts are as shown in figure 13.1.2a, above. For full I/O wiring details, refer to
Section 2.2.
INTERNAL WIRING
Figure 13.1.2b, below, shows details of the wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder
rear panel.
Portable case
Recorder back panel
L Brown L Power supply unit
Line supply N Blue N
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz) E Green/Yellow E
Chassis ground
Earth (Safety earth)
Ethernet
connector
13
13
14
Option board 2
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
1 1
2
Option board 3
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6 6
7 7
8
8
1
1
2
V+ 2 V+ Input board 2
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
6 V- 6 V-
7 I 7 I
V+ 8 V+
8
9 V- 9 V-
I 10 I
10
11
CJ
12 12
sensor
V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
15 I 15 I
V+ 16 V+
16
V- 17 V-
17
18 I 18 I
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
1
2
V+
1
2 V+ Input board 1
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
V- 6 V-
6
I 7 I
7
V+ 8 V+
8
V- 9 V-
9
I 10 I
10
11
CJ
12 12
sensor
V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
I 15 I
15
V+ 16 V+
16
V- 17 V-
Bottom connector 17
18
I 18 I
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
Note: Only one transmitter power supply can be fitted in the portable case, and may be termi-
nated only at option slot 2 OR option slot 4 (if available).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
+V 0V +V 0V +V 0V
Portable case
Recorder back panel
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the 1
Option board 1
Serial Communications and USB op-
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
Option board 3
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
2
V+ 2 V+ Input board 1
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
V- 6 V-
6
I 7 I
7
V+ 8 V+
8
V- 9 V-
9
I 10 I
10
11
CJ 12
12
sensor V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
I 15 I
15
V+ 16 V+
Bottom connector 16
17
V- 17 V-
I 18 I
18
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
13.3.1 Introduction
This option is supplied as a six-channel, 100 mm recorder in a rugged portable case, configured for five
type-T thermocouples and one pressure transducer. The option comes complete with pressure trans-
ducer, insertion tubes and miniature plugs for type T thermocouples. As supplied, the recorder is for use
with small, unwrapped utensil sterilisers. The default configuration for the thermocouples is: Function =
Type T, Input range = 0 to 150˚C, and for the transducer: Input range = -1 to + 3 bar.
13.3.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.3.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conduc-
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of wiring the thermocouples to the relevant plugs and plugging them and the
(pre-wired) pressure transducer in. Figure 13.3.2a shows the arrangement of the sockets at the rear of a
six-channel recorder (12 channel similar), and of an 18-channel recorder. Figure 13.3.2b shows the wiring
of the thermocouple plugs.
Ethernet RJ45
Con 15
Con 16
Con 17
Con 18
Con 13
Con 11
Con 10
Con 12
Con 9
Con8
Con7
Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6 Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6
L Brown L
Line supply
N Blue N
(100 to 240V) PSU
(50/60 Hz) E E
Chassis ground Green/Yellow
(safety earth)
Earth
Transmitter PSU
L Brown
+ Red Terminal
Serial Communications and USB op- O/P 3 Black
Block
+ Red
O/P 1 Black
1 Input
Note: For the sake of clarity, only 2 V+
+ Board
one input board shown. Two and Con 1
- 3 V-
three input board wiring similar. 4
5 V+
+
Con 2 6 V-
If fitted, input board 2 channels 1 - 7
to 6 are wired to connectors 7 to 12 8 V+
+
respectively; input board 3 channels Con 3 - 9 V-
1 to 6 wired to connectors 13 to 18 10
respectively. CJ 11
sensor
12
+ 13 V+
Con 4 14 V-
-
15
+ 16 V+
Con 5 17 V-
-
18
+ V+ 19
Con 6 Shunt V- 20
-
Wiring from thermocouple 21
connectors to input terminals
22
is in thermocouple wire
Ethernet
connector
13.3.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Pressure transducer
Input range -1 to 3 Bar G
Output range 4 to 20 mA
Supply voltage range 12 to 32V dc
Non linearity/hysteresis ≤0.25% span
Long term stability 0.1% in 12 months
Safety isolation
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Channel to channel: 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
Channel to ground 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
13.4.1 Introduction
This option allows the connection of up to 12 type J, K or T thermocouples together with up to two option
boards, or up to 18 thermocouples with no option boards. Transmitter power supply is not available with
this option.
The type of thermocouple (the same for all channels) must be specified at time of order. Each thermocou-
ple input channel will be configured at the factory for the specified type of thermocouple and will be set
to a range of 0 to 100 degrees Celsius.
Thermocouple-style connectors with copper terminals can also be fitted, for use with non-thermocouple
inputs. For such channels the recorder is pre-configured as: Function = Linear, Input range = 0 to 1 Volt.
13.4.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.4.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conduc-
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug, and inserting the
plugs into the relevant socket at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.4.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel for 12 and 18 channel versions.
Figure 13.4.2b shows thermocouple wiring details, and Figure 13.4.2c shows the wiring between the
portable case rear panel and the recorder for a 12 thermocouple option.
Ethernet RJ45
Con 15
Con 16
Con 17
Con 18
Con 13
1 22
Con7 Con8 Con9 Con10 Con11 Con12
Con 11
Con 10
Con 12
Con 9
Con8
Con7
Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6 Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6
+ wire
— wire
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB op- 1
1
2
Option board 1
2
3
Options 8
9
8
9
connector 10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
Option board 2
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
+
1
2 V+ Input board 1
CON 1 - 3 V-
4 I
+ 5 V+
CON 2 - 6 V-
7 I
+ 8 V+
CON 3 - 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ
12
sensor
+ 13 V+
CON 4 - 14 V-
15 I
+ 16 V+
CON 5 - 17 V-
18 I
+ 19 V+
CON 6 - 20 V-
21 I
22
13.4.3 Specification
Safety isolation
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Channel to channel: 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
Channel to ground 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
Note: The polarity of the dc supply is not critical, but the recorder operates more efficiently with
the polarity shown below
Earth
Chassis
Ground
24V Earth 0V
Supply connector:
20 to 52Vdc or
20 to 42V(RMS)
1 22
22
1 22
1 22
13.6.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature com-
pensating connectors. Thermocouples may be connected directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
13.6.1 gives details.
13.6.2 Wiring
Caution
1. Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied, lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
2. Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
As shown in Figure 13.6.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conduc-
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 13.6.2b),
and inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.6.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 13.6.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
Ethernet RJ45
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5 + wire
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Figure 13.6.2a Rear panel connector layout Figure 13.6.2b Connector detail (typical)
Ethernet
connector
1
11+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 3
Black V- Ch13
11- 3
4 I
12+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch14
V-
12- 6
7 I
13+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch15
13- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
14+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch16
14- 15 I
15+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch17
15- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch18
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
1
6+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 2
Black V- Ch7
6- 3
4 I
7+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch8
V-
7- 6
7 I
8+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch9
8- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
9+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch10
9- 15 I
10+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch11
10- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch12
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
Input board 1
1
1+ Brown
Black
2 V+
Ch1
V-
1- 3
4 I
2+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch2
V-
2- 6
7 I
3+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch3
3- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
4+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch4
4- 15 I
5+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch5
5- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch6
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
RTD mounted
on connector block
(three places)
13.6.3 Specification
14.1.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using mini-
ature compensating connectors mounted on the rear terminal cover. Thermocouples may be connected
directly, or using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detec-
tor (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of the relevant input board.
For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 30 do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder
configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.1.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1 Connector 6 - Channel 7 Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 2 - Channel 2 Connector 7 - Channel 8 Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 3 - Channel 3 Connector 8 - Channel 9 Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 4 - Channel 4 Connector 9 - Channel 10 Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 5 - Channel 5 Connector 10 - Channel 11 Connector 15 - Channel 17
14.1.2 Wiring
SIGNAL WIRING
Caution
Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.1.2a), and
inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 14.1.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 14.1.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
+ wire
Ethernet RJ45 E
L N
Mains (supply)connection
Chan 25 Chan 26 Chan 27 Chan 28 Chan 29 Chan 31 Chan 32 Chan 33 Chan 34 Chan 35
21- 21+ 22- 22+ 23- 23+ 24- 24+ 25- 25+ 26- 26+ 27- 27+ 28- 28+ 29- 29+ 30- 30+
Chan 13 Chan 14 Chan 15 Chan 16 Chan 17 Chan 19 Chan 20 Chan 21 Chan 22 Chan 23
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ 16- 16+ 17- 17+ 18- 18+ 19- 19+ 20- 20+
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5 Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ 6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Ethernet
connector
1
Input board 6
1
11+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 3 V+ 2 Brown
26+
Ch13 Ch31 V- 3 Black
26-
Black V-
11- 3
4 I I 4
12+ Red 5 V+
Ch14 Ch32
V+ 5
6
Red
Black
27+
V-
12-
Black 6
7
V-
I I 7
27-
13+ Orange 8 V+
Ch15 Ch33
V+ 8 Orange
Black
28+
9
28-
Black V-
13- 9 V-
10 I I 10
11 11
CJ sensor 12 12 CJ sensor
14+ Yellow
Black
13 V+
V- Ch16 Ch34
V+
V-
13
14
Yellow
Black
29+
29-
14
14- 15 I I 15
15+ Green
Black
16 V+
Ch17 Ch35
V+
V-
16
17
Green
Black
30+
V-
15- 17
18 I I 18
30-
Blue 19 V+ V+ 19 Blue
Blue 20 V- Ch18 Ch36 V- 20 Blue
Violet 21 I I 21 Violet
Violet 22 22 Violet
1 1
1
Input board 1 Input board 4
1
1+ Brown
Black
2 V+
Ch1 Ch19
V+ 2
3
Brown
Black
16+
V- V-
1- 3
4 I I 4
16-
2+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch2 Ch20
V+ 5
6
Red
Black
17+
V- V-
2- 6
7 I I 7
17-
3+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch3 Ch21
V+ 8 Orange
Black
18+
3- 18-
9 V- V- 9
10 I I 10
11 11
CJ sensor 12 12 CJ sensor
4+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch4 Ch22
V+
V-
13
14
Yellow
Black
19+
4- 15 I I 15 19-
5+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch5 Ch23
V+
V-
16 Green
Black
20+
5- 17
18 I I
17
18
20-
Blue 19 V+ V+ 19 Blue
Blue 20 V- Ch6 Ch24 V- 20 Blue
Violet 21 I I 21 Violet
Violet 22 22 Violet
RTD mounted
on connector blocks
(six places)
14.1.3 Specification
14.2.1 Introduction
This option uses two Remote CJC Block units to allow up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be con-
nected to the recorder using miniature compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ con-
nector unit, with copper wire connections from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples
may be connected to the Remote CJ unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detec-
tor (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the six input boards.
Most connector numbers do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder configuration
names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.2.1 gives details.
Note: Both of the Remote CJC Block units have connectors numbered 1 to 15, so it is important
that the units be identified clearly as, for example’ the ‘input boards 1 to 3’ unit and the ‘input
boards 4 to 6’ unit in order to reduce the possibility of wiring errors.
Figure 14.2.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the Remote CJ Block units; Figure 14.2.2c
shows the recorder connector layout and figure 14.2.2d shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit
and the recorder.
+ wire
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Input boards
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5
1 to 3
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
(to recorder input board 3)
Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 2)
Lower connector
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 1)
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
Chan 25 Chan 26 Chan 27 Chan 28 Chan 29
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Input boards
Chan 19 Chan 20 Chan 21 Chan 22 Chan 23
4 to 6
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
(to recorder input board 6)
Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 5)
Lower connector
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 4)
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input channels 37 to 42
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736 Input board 6
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724 Input board 4
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7 Input board 2
Input board 1 Input channels 1 to 6
2
Block
te CJ
Wire colours chosen
for clarity
Remo Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 6
Chan 31 Chan 32 Chan 33 Chan 34 Chan 35 Chan 36
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
board 5 Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Lower connector
Chan 25 Chan 26 Chan 27 Chan 28 Chan 29 Chan 30
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 4
Chan 19 Chan 20 Chan 21 Chan 22 Chan 23Chan 24
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 3
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Middle connector
Chan 13 Chan 14 Chan 15 Chan 16 Chan 17 Chan 18
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 2
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11Chan 12
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
board 1
Remote CJ Block 1
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
14.2.3 Specification
145 mm 75.6 mm
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
127.5 mm
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
14.3.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature
compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ connector unit, with copper wire connec-
tions from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples may be connected to the Remote CJ
unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
14.3.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1 Connector 6 - Channel 7 Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 2 - Channel 2 Connector 7 - Channel 8 Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 3 - Channel 3 Connector 8 - Channel 9 Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 4 - Channel 4 Connector 9 - Channel 10 Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 5 - Channel 5 Connector 10 - Channel 11 Connector 15 - Channel 17
Figure 14.3.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the remote CJ unit, and the recorder; figure
14.3.2c shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit and the recorder.
+ wire
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
(to recorder input board 3)
Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 2)
Lower connector
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 1)
a. Remote CJ unit
Safety Earth
USB 1 USB 2 (M4)
USB Ports (option)
E
L N
Serial comms (option)
Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply)
RJ45 connection
b. Recorder
Remote CJ unit
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- Middle connector
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Recorder input board 2
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
Remote CJ unit
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
Lower connector
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Recorder input board 1
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
14.3.3 Specification
Dimensions 145 mm wide x 127.5 high x 75.6 mm deep (excluding DIN rail)
145 mm 75.6 mm
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
127.5 mm
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
15 TUS OPTION
This option affects the way in which operator batch initiation occurs. Section 4.3.10 contains a full de-
scription of batch recording and the user should refer to that section for details not contained here. The
option also incorporates the ‘Remote CJ block’ option, so channels 6, 12, 18 and so on are ‘reference’
channels used to measure the block temperature.
Pre calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure before the batch
can be initiated.
Post calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure when the batch
is stopped.
Figure 15.2a shows the initial display. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 15.2b.
Discard Apply
Discard Apply
Example:
05/10/10 16:20:57 5) Temps1e Pre cal high 5.010 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 4) Temps1d Pre cal high 4.994 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 3) Temps1c Pre cal high 5.001 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 2) Temps1b Pre cal high 4.997 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 1) Temps1a Pre cal high 4.993 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 5) Temps1e Pre cal low 0.000 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 4) Temps1e Pre cal low -0.002 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 3) Temps1e Pre cal low -0.002 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 2) Temps1e Pre cal low 0.001 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 1) Temps1e Pre cal low -0.003 Post cal low 0.000
Batch initiation must be by operator action - job triggered batches do not support pre and post calibra-
tion.
ANNEX A: SPECIFICATION
Installation category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V.
Pollution degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity
caused by condensation shall be expected.
Standard features
Bridge ‘Lite’
Configuration Copy
CSV Archive file format
E-mail
File transfer protocol (FTP)
6 Groups
Job search
Log scales
MODBUS TCP
Messages
Timers
USB port behind access flap (not stainless-steel case option)
Web server
Options
Software: ASCII Printer output (supplied as a part of the Serial Communications option)
Audit trail
21CFR11Audit
Batch Recording
Bridge ‘Full’ version
EtherNet/IP Server (adapter)
Event Buttons (supplied as a part of the Screen Builder option)
Master Comms
Maths/Totalisers/Counters
Multiple groups (six additional groups)
Screen Builder (User screens)
Security Manager
Simulation
Thermal Uniformity Survey (TUS)
Hardware: Transmitter power supply - isolated (100 mm recorders only)
Low supply voltage
Access flap lock
Stainless steel case (no access flap) (check availability)
Further two USB ports at rear of recorder
Serial Communications
Environmental Performance
Temperature limits Operation: 0 to 50˚C.
Storage: - 20 to +60˚C
Humidity limits Operation: 5% to 80% RH non - condensing
Storage: 5% to 90% RH non - condensing
Altitude (maximum) <2000 metres
Protection Standard bezel/display: IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
Standard sleeve: IP20
Portable case option: IP21
Stainless-steel case: IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
Shock BS EN61010
Vibration (10 Hz to 150Hz) 2g peak
Physical
Panel mounting DIN 43700
Bezel size Small frame: 144mm x 144mm
Note: For portable case dimensions - see section 13.
Large frame: 292mm x 292mm
Panel cutout Small frame: 138mm x 138mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
Large frame; 281mm x 281mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
Depth behind bezel Small frame: 246.5 mm (211.5 mm without terminal cover, 284 with long terminal cover)
Large frame: 260.90 mm (211 mm without terminal cover)
Weight Small frame: 3 kg. max. (5 kg. max. if fitted in portable case)
Large frame: 7 kg. max.
Mounting angle ±45 ˚ from vertical
Electrical safety
BS EN61010. Installation category II, Pollution degree 2
Power requirements
Supply voltage Standard: 100 to 230 VAC (±15%); 47 to 63 Hz or 110 to 370V dc (dc supply not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply
fitted)
Low voltage option: 20 to 42V RMS; 45 to 400 Hz, or 20 to 54V dc (option not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted)
Power (max.) All options: 60 W
Inrush current Standard: 36A Note:
Low voltage option: 36A Check factory for availabil-
Namur compliant option: 5.5A at 25˚C ity of Low Voltage option
Fuse type None
Interrupt protection Standard: Holdup >200msec. at 240V ac, with full load.
Low voltage option: Holdup 20msec at 20Vdc or RMS, with full load.
Back-up battery
Type Poly-carbonmonofluoride/lithium (BR2330). Part Number PA261095. See also section B2.2.
Support time A fully-charged, new battery supports the Real-Time Clock for a minimum of 1 year with the recorder unpowered
Replacement period 3-years
Stored data Time; date; values for totalisers, counters and timers; batch data; values for those maths functions with history,
such as Fvalue, Rolling average, Stopwatch etc.
Touch screen
Colour TFT LCD with cold-cathode backlighting, fitted with resistive, analogue, touch panel
Screen specification Small frame: 1/4 VGA Resolution = 320 x 240 pixels
Large frame: XGA Resolution= 1024 x 768 pixels
Update information
Input/relay output sample rate: 8 Hz.
Display update: 8 Hz,
Archive sample value: Latest value at archive time
Trended/displayed value: Latest value at display update time
USB ports
Number of ports 1 at front of recorder (standard*); 2 further ports (optional - at rear of instrument)
(*No front USB port with Stainless steel case option)
Standard USB1.1
Transmission speeds 12Mbits/sec (full speed devices) or 1.5Mbits/sec (low speed devices)
Maximum current per port 500mA
Peripherals supported Floppy disk drive, Keyboard, Bar code reader, Mouse, Memory stick.
Note: The recorder meets the industrial EMC requirements of BS EN61326. Typically, USB pe-
ripherals are tested to domestic information technology standards (BS EN55022) with category C
performance. Some USB peripherals, designed for use in domestic or office environments, can be
susceptible to ‘lock up’ in environments containing high electromagnetic field strengths. In order
to recover from such ‘lock up’ situations, the peripheral must be disconnected and then recon-
nected. Recorder operation is not affected.
Other items
Virus susceptibility The 6000 series VxWorks operating system is immune to viruses targeted at Windows based operating systems.
As at December 2005, there are no known viruses that target VxWorks.
Calibration coefficients Input: The Read-only input coefficients are stored in EEPROM on the input board.
Instrument: Instrument configuration is held in FLASH memory and has no effect on calibration coefficients.
DC input ranges
Shunt Externally mounted resistor modules
Additional error due to shunt 0.1% of input
Performance See table
Low High Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Resolution
Range Range (Instrument at 20 deg C) (Instrument at 20 deg C) performance
-38 mV 38 mV 1.4 µV 0.013% input + 0.031% range 0.030% input + 0.052% range 25ppm of input per deg C
-150 mV 150 mV 5.5 µV 0.013% input + 0.028% range 0.029% input + 0.039% range 25ppm of input per deg C
-1 V 1V 37 µV 0.013% input + 0.024% range 0.029% input + 0.029% range 25ppm of input per deg C
-20 V 20 V 720 µV 0.075% input + 0.027% range 0.393% input + 0.033% range 388ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instru-
ments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
*WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
Low High Resolu- Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Range Range tion (Instrument at 20 deg. C) (Instrument at 20 deg. C) performance
0Ω 150Ω 5mΩ 0.027% input + 0.034% range 0.037% input + 0.077% range 30ppm of input per deg C
0Ω 600Ω 22mΩ 0.027% input + 0.035% range 0.037% input + 0.057% range 30ppm of input per deg C
0Ω 5kΩ 148mΩ 0.030% input + 0.034% range 0.040% input + 0.041% range 30ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instru-
ments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
Thermocouple data
Temperature scale ITS90
Bias current 0.05nA
Cold junction compensation types Off, internal, external, remote
Remote CJC source: Any input or maths channel.
Internal CJC error 1˚C max with instrument at 25˚C
Internal CJC rejection ratio 50:1 minimum
Upscale/downscale drive Types: ‘High’. ‘low’ or ‘none’ selectable for each thermocouple channel.
Additional error: Typically 0.01˚C - depends on wiring. (Detect current = 57nA.)
Types, ranges and accuracies See table
Total error = input error + range error + temperature error +linearisation error + cold junction error.
Input error:
From thermocouple tables, a type T thermocouple generates a voltage of 17.819mV at 350 ˚C. From the
dc performance table above, the maximum error is 0.030% input = 0.03 x 17.819/100 = 5.346µV
Range error:
The 38mV range is used as the type t thermocouple is defined to cover the range -270˚C (-6.258mV) to
+400˚C (20.872mV). From the dc performance table, the maximum range error is 0.052% range, and the
range is 38 + 38 = 76 mV. Thus the maximum range error is 0.052 x 76/100 = 39.52µV.
Temperature error:
The dc performance table above is specifed at 20˚C, but the ambient in this example is 40˚C. From the
dc performance table, the worst case temperature performance is 25ppm/˚C, so our error is 25 x (40-20)
x 17.819 x 10 -6 = 8.910µV.
Linearisation error:
From the thermocouple table, the maximum linearisation error for a type t thermocouple is 0.02 ˚C
Maximum error
From the above, the total error adds up as follows:
Input error: 5.346µV
Range error: 39.520µV
Temperature error: 8.910µV
Linearisation error: 0.02˚C
CJC error: 1.30 ˚C
Total error: 53.776µV + 1.32˚C
From thermocouple tables, a change of 1˚C is equivalent to a change of 60µV, so a change of 53.776µV is
equivalent to a change of 0.896˚C.
Thus the total worst case error for this example is (0.896 + 1.32) = 2.216˚C
PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS
This section contains dc performance and resistance input data for instruments with status levels prior to
D6 (June 2007).
DC input ranges
Shunt Externally mounted resistor modules
Additional error due to shunt 0.1% of input
Performance See table
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instru-
ments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
*WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
Resistance inputs
Temperature scale ITS90
Types, ranges and accuracies See tables (values exclude influence of lead resistance)
Influence of lead resistance Error: Negligible
Mismatch: 1Ω/Ω
Maximum source current 250µA
Low High Resolu- Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Range Range tion (Instrument at 20 deg. C) (Instrument at 20 deg. C) performance
0Ω 150Ω 5mΩ 0.027% input + 0.034% range 0.042% input + 0.110% range 35ppm of input per deg C
0Ω 600Ω 22mΩ 0.027% input + 0.035% range 0.042% input + 0.053% range 35ppm of input per deg C
0Ω 6kΩ 148mΩ 0.030% input + 0.028% range 0.045% input + 0.035% range 35ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instru-
ments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
RTD type Overall range (˚C) Standard Max. linearisation error
Cu10 -20 to + 400 General Electric Co. 0.02˚C
Cu53 -70 to + 200 RC21-4-1966 < 0.01˚C
JPT100 -220 to + 630 JIS C1604:1989 0.01˚C
Ni100 -60 to + 250 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Ni120 -50 to + 170 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Pt100 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
Pt100A -200 to + 600 Eurotherm Recorders SA 0.09˚C
Pt1000 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
General
Maximum number of relay boards
Small-frame unit Four
Large-frame unit Nine
Number of relays per board
Changeover relays: Three
Normally open relays: Four
Normally closed relays: Four
Estimated mechanical life 30,000,000 operations
Update rate See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
AC load ratings
Derating
The figures given below are for resistive loads. For reactive or inductive loads, de-rate in accordance with graph 1, in which
F1 = Actually measured results on representative samples
F2 = Typical values (according to experience)
Contact life = Resistive contact life x reduction factor.
Maximum switching power 500VA
Maximum contact voltage 250V providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
Maximum contact current 2 Amps providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
DC load ratings
Maximum switching power See graph 2 for operating volt/Amp envelope
Maximum contact voltage/current See graph 2 for examples.
Safety isolation
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Relay to relay: 300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Relay to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
0.7 F1 100
0.6
0.5
50
0.4 40 inductive load
30 (L/R = 20msec)
0.3 20
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
Power factor (cos φ)
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 20
DC current (Amps)
General
Maximum number of event input boards Four
Number of inputs per board Six
Type of input Contact closure (active closed) or voltage level (active low)
Recognition levels (input to ‘C’ terminal) (R = contact resistance)
Active: -30V to + 0.8V or switch contacts closed (R < 35kΩ).
Undefined: + 0.8V to + 2.0V (35 kΩ < R < 200kΩ)
Inactive: + 2V to +30V or switch contacts open (R > 200kΩ).
Maximum frequency 8 Hz
Minimum closure or pulse width 62.5 msec
Current sink for voltage inputs 10mA max
Isolation
Event input to ground: 50V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Event input to Event input: 0V
General
Max number of analogue o/p boards Four
Number of outputs per board Two
Output ranges Voltage: 0 to 10V (source 5mA max.)
Current: 0 to 20 mA
Update rate See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
Step response 250msec (10% to 90%)
Linearity 0.024% of hardware range
Performance See table
Safety isolation
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Output channel-to output channel: 300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Output channel to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
ANNEX B: REFERENCE
B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY
An 'S' symbol is displayed at the top of the screen whilst the recorder is in sales demo mode.
Main Menu
Touching the screen with the stylus produces a crosshair at the position the recorder believes the screen
to have been touched. It is up to the user to decide if the response is good enough for recorder opera-
tion. After a few seconds of non-operation, the recorder returns to the top level touch screen display
(figure 1.4).
Variant: 6100A
Software: 4.0
DRAM: 67108864
SRAM: 32768
FLASH: 134217728
MAC address: 000A8D002026
Date: 02/08/05
Time: 16:41:58
Main Menu
00 00 00 N.N
3_RELAY_1 4_RELAY_2
Option boards
4_RELAY_3 EVENT_IP_3
AI_6
Input boards
AI_6
Main Menu
Figure B1.6 Diag Summary (small frame recorder - large frame similar)
Touching one of these keys performs a loopback test on the relevant Serial
port. In order for the test to be successful, a 9-way D-type socket, wired as in 1 2 3
5
figure B1.6.3, must be fitted to the relevant serial port at the rear of the re- 9
6 8
corder. If wired as shown, the socket is suitable for testing with both EIA232 7
and EIA485 communications standards. The test will result in the legend 'S1(2)
Passed' or 'S1(2) Failed' replacing 'Serial 1' or 'Serial 2' on the appropriate key. Short pin 1 to pin 7; pin 2 to pin 3;
If the Serial Comms option is not fitted, pressing either key returns a 'Failed' and pin 6 to pin 8
B1.6.4 Battery
This area, normally green, flashes red/white when the battery needs to be replaced (section B2). Battery
status is checked once every 15 minutes.
B1.6.5 Lockable
The lockable flap display is green if the lockable flap is fitted, or flashes red/white if the option is not fit-
ted.
Exercise relays by
1 (Energised) 2 (De-Energised) touching keys.
Relay 4 greyed-out
3 (De-Energised) 4 (De-Energised) for 3-relay boards.
Return to previous
Main Menu menu level
EVENT INPUTS
If event input boards are fitted, touching the option board key calls a display showing input status (1 = ac-
tive; 0 = not active). Changes in input status can be displayed by operating the 'Update' key.
B1.7 QUIT
Allows the user to quit diagnostics (after confirmation). The recorder restarts in normal operating mode.
B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Note: All battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change (see Annex A for details of stored
data)..
1. Isolate the recorder from supply power and remove the recorder from the panel (if fitted)
2. Remove the recorder cover by removing the Four Torx headed screws (A) and the Pozidriv-headed
screw B, and then lifting the cover up and out, under the gasket (C).
A
A
A A
A
A
B A B
A
Large Frame
Small Frame
C
3. With the cover removed, the battery board is accessible, allowing the exhausted battery to be slid
out of its holder and the replacement battery to be inserted (+ up).
Small Frame
Large Frame
Fig 2.3a Flap release - small frame units Fig 2.3b Flap release - large frame units
B3 OPTION ENABLING
See 'Upgrade' in section 4.6.3.
B4 COLOUR SELECTION
The following table, gives RGB values and decimal and hex numbers for the available channel colours.
Normally, this table is necessary only when communicating over the Modbus link.
Note: Colour representation varies from screen to screen. For this reason, it is unlikely that the
colour on a PC will match those on these pages or those on the recorder display.
Red 255 0 0 0 00
Blue 0 0 255 1 01
Green 0 255 0 2 02
Russet 170 95 0 5 05
Jade 0 95 0 7 07
Indigo 85 0 102 14 0E
Dark Brown 85 63 0 15 0F
Ægean 0 63 51 16 10
Aubergine 85 0 51 18 12
Hyacinth 170 0 51 21 15
Dark Green 0 63 0 22 16
Bluebell 85 31 255 24 18
Orange 255 95 0 25 19
Terracotta 170 63 0 28 1C
Lime 0 223 0 30 1E
Black 0 0 0 47 2F
Dark Grey 64 64 64 49 31
Grey 128 128 128 50 32
PORT Usage
Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex
NUL 0 00 Space 32 20 @ 64 40 ‘ 96 60
SOH 1 01 ! 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61
STX 2 02 " 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62
ETX 3 03 # 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63
EOT 4 04 $ 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64
ENQ 5 05 % 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65
ACK 6 06 & 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66
BEL 7 07 ’ 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67
BS 8 08 ( 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68
HT 9 09 ) 41 29 I 73 49 i 105 69
LF 10 0A * 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A
VT 11 0B + 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B
FF 12 0C , 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C
CR 13 0D - 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D
SO 14 0E . 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E
SI 15 0F / 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F
DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70
DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71
DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72
DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73
DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74
NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75
SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76
ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77
CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78
EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79
SUB 26 1A : 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A
ESC 27 1B ; 59 3B [ 91 5B { 123 7B
FS 28 1C < 60 3C \ 92 5C | 124 7C
GS 29 1D = 61 3D ] 93 5D } 125 7D
RS 30 1E > 62 3E ^ 94 5E ~ 126 7E
US 31 1F ? 63 3F _ 95 5F Not printed 127 7F
Notes:
1 All the above characters can be used as Start or End-of-message characters (entered in deci-
mal)
2 If characters 0 to 31 ( 00 to 1F) are used as message characters, they will be replaced by ques-
tion marks on the screen.
The erase history procedure consists of entering a special keycode into the System\Upgrade\Key Code
area (section 4.6.3) and operating the 'Apply' button.
CAUTION
The option should be used with discretion, as once the history has been erased, it can never be
regained.
1. Recorders fitted with this option come complete with a file called 'HMT.TXT in the 'user/' area of the
filing system, accessed as described in section 5.
Filer Options
2. Highlight this file, and copy it using the Filer Options menu 'Copy' key.
3. With a memory device (e.g. SD card, Memory stick etc.) inserted, use the Filer New Delete
Options menu 'Paste' key to save the file into the removable media area.
Cut Copy
4. Move the storage device from the recorder to a pc, and open the file in an ap-
propriate program (e.g. 'Notebook') to reveal a key code. Paste Refresh
5. This keycode can be kept in a secure area for re-use in subsequent erase op-
erations for this recorder. Figure B8.1
Filer option menu
!!!HISTORY ERASE!!!
WARNING:
ALL HISTORY DATA WILL BE PERMANENTLY ERASED
(The instrument will restart after erasing history)
Are you ceratin you wish to proceed?
Ok Cancel
Note: This operation erases only the recorder's history files; the recorder's configuration remains
unchanged. The Save/Restore 'New' selection (section 4.2), with all tickboxes ticked must be used
to reset the configuration to default values (if required).
B9 MENU STRUCTURE
Section 4
Root Menu Engineer Group name
Archive Save/Restore C o n f i g Security Network System
18:10:39
05/10/05
Home Operator
Goto Group
Selected
Home page File Unlock Flap Group 1
Group 2
Trend display
mode Goto View Goto Group Group 3
Group 4
Engineer
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6
11:52:0
4
05/10/05
Section 5
700.87ûC
Channel 1
487.39ûC 235.68ûC 378.99ûC 0.49V 0.85V
700.87
Group 5 Group 6
1
Engineer 17:06:41
400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00 05/10/05
\ Hide
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1) Name
\user\
Type
Flash Goto View: Group 1
\P c a r d\ Removable
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
11:49:24
05/10/05
Figure Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure
B9b B9c B9d to B9i B9j B9k B9l/ B9m
05/10/05 11:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
11:46:44 Go
dis to se
05//05
pla lec
y m ted
ode
Option Menu
Batch 2 Vertical trend
Note Alarm summary Message Log Engineer Group name 11:52:04
Horizontal trend
3
05/10/05
Engineer 17:07:39 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6
Faceplates On/Off 05/10/05
700.87ûC 487.39ûC 235.68ûC 378.99ûC 0.49V 0.85V
\user\ Hide
Engineer Group name 11:17:51
05/10/05 Logged out
Group name 09:06:22
Channel 1 700.87
Engineer Group name 14:21:30
05/10/05
Batch number:020205A12 05/10/05
Channel Cycling Off Name Type Date Bytes 400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00 Channel 1 700.87 ûC
user\
Alarm Summary All Messages All History 800
04/10/05 08:57:03
Enter History s d b\ 01/10/05 10:14:56 Message Log: Group name
l i b\ 29/09/05 14:25:13
1(1) Water temp 1a 60.0000 C 68.5277 05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
05/10/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
2 (1) Water temp 1b 30.0000 C 23.4531
Trend History
cal\ 01/09/05 10:13:48 05/10/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
Preparing History, please wait 2 (2)
3 (1)
Water temp 1b
0il pressure
10.0000 C
250.000 PSI
23.4531
260.3425
05/10/05 09:06:18 Customer: FishesRus
05/10/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
4
05/10/05 14:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
14:46:44
5
05/10/05
17:08:08
Numeric page
Engineer
05/10/05
\user\cal\ Hide
Name Type Date Bytes
TouchScreen uha 03/10/05 10:13:48
Logged out
Group name 18:08:20
05/10/05
Logged out Group name 11:05:33
05/10/05
Channel 1 Furnace 1 Temp 13 1 hr/rev Furnace 1
Full Screen
Te..
05/10/05 11:05
Batch
Note
487.39 used to scroll through display modes; 105/10/05 11:00 05/10/05 10:20
Furnace 1
1 3 6 5 . 2 1/ l h r
Channel 4
1 2 9 9 . 6 5/ l h r
Channel 5
Typical displays -
0.49
Flow 3
05/10/05 10:45 05/10/05 10:35
V
see section 3.4 for full details. 05/10/05 10:40
Filer Options
Horizontal bargraph Vertical bargraph
New Delete Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
700.87˚C
18:09:47
05/10/05 Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
10:43:50
05/10/05
Cut Copy
400.00 800.00
Channel 2 487.39˚C
400.00 800.00
0.00 400.00
Channel 4 378.99˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 5 0.49V
0.00 1.00
400.00 400.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cancel Archive
Configuration Data
Restore
Save/Restore Security Data
(section 4.2) Network Data
Screens Data
Save Restore
Save As Text
Export
Import
User linearisation 1) UserLin1
File Name userlin
Export User
Linearisation Export
\user\ Hide
Import
Apply Discard
Lo
ca
Groups Show Remote settings
Figure B9d
l
Archive to Remote None
Channels
Event Number 1) Event 1 Ftp File format Binary
Views Source 1 Alarm on Group Remote path / h i s t o r y
Archive Events On Group 1) Group 1 Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
(Section 4.3.6) Source 2 Point Alarm
Events Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
On Math 12 Primary password * * * * *
Event Buttons Alarm 2
Retype password * * * * *
Messages Source 1 Sense Source 1
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Operator And
User Linearisations Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Source 2 Sense Not Source 2
Batch Secondary password * * * * *
Descriptor Event 1
Retype password * * * * *
Maths Job Number 1
Category No Action Apply Discard
Figure B9f Totalisers
Lo
Apply Discard
ca
Counters
l
Archive
Timers (Section 4.3.5) Compression Normal
Event Buttons (Section 4.3.7)
Figure B9g Connections Flash Size 9 6 . 2 5 Mb
Button Number 1) Button 1
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Master Comms Descriptor Button 1
Duration 1 0 . 8 6 Days
Figure B9h Output Channels Type Latched
CSV include Values
Text Off Text CSV include Messages
Demand Writes
Latched Text On Text CSV include Header details These fields appear only
Emails Require Signing CSV include Column headings if Media File Format is
'CSV' or 'Binary and CSV'
Require Authorisation CSV Date/Time format Spreadsheet numeric
Reports
Figure B9i CSV use Tab delimiter
EtherNet/IP Server Apply Discard
Show Local settings
Options User Linearisations Media mediacard
(Section 4.3.9) Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
User Linearisation 3) UserLin3
Messages On Media Full Overwrite
Descriptor UserLin3
(Section 4.3.8) Media Size 30.4746094 Mb
Format Numeric
Message Number 1) The value of Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Number of Points 2
Message The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}, {5} Media Full event limit 100 %
X1 0
Y1 0 Replace {1} with Source Descriptor Apply Discard
X2 1 Replace {2} with Source Value
Messages Descriptor Fo 1
A/B Switching
User Linearisations Batch
Scale Low 0 Mins
(Section 4.3.10)
Batch
Scale high 60
(Section 15) Scale Type None
Maths
Zone low 0 %
Totalisers Zone high 100 %
PV Format Numeric
Counters
Max Decimal Digits 2
Timers Colour 26
Figure B9g Connections Alarm Number 1
Apply Discard Maths Enable Off
Master Comms (Section 4.3.11) Job Number 1
Figure B9h Output Channels Category No Action
Apply Discard
Demand Writes
Emails
Timers (Section 4.3.14)
Totalisers (Section 4.3.12)
Reports
Figure B9i Timer number 1) Timer 1
EtherNet/IP Server Totaliser Number 1) Totaliser 1 Select totaliser
Enable number
Enable
Options Remaining 00:00:00
Value 123456 Units (totaliser)
Repeat in 00:00:00
Counters (Section 4.3.13) Total of Channel 1 Select channel etc. to be totalised
Reset now Low cut off 0 ch units Units of channel
being totalised
Counter number 1) Counter 1 High cut off 999999 ch units
Start now Enable Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure B9f Config menu structure (sheet 3)
Emails
Reports
Figure B9i Modbus Slave (Section 4.3.15) Modbus Master (Section 4.3.15)
EtherNet/IP Server
Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate. Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate.
Parity None Select None, Odd or Even Parity None Select None, Odd or Even
Timeout 1000 ms
Apply Discard Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Apply Discard
M
(Section 4.3.18)
as
(Section 4.3.17)
te
Emails
rC
Write number 1) Write 1
om
Reports 1) Output 1
Output Channel Number
m
Figure B9i Enable
s
EtherNet/IP Server Enable
Demand Type Master Comms
Options Output Type Master Comms
Status OK
Slave 1) Furn Recorder 2
Demand Write Parameter Comms Channel
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder Scaling High/Low
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 Scale Low 0 Scaling items appear only
Scale High 100 for some slave types
Point Type Channel
Point Number 1 Point Type Channel
Descriptor Write 1 Point Number 1
Source Channel 1 Process Value Medium Priority
Default 0 Descriptor Output 1
Allow Constant Edits Source 1) Channel 4
On Error Write Default Default 0
Disable Retries On Error Write Default
Send On Power Up Apply Discard Detect All Slaves
Apply Discard
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Login (section 3.3.1) Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
Figure Figure Figs B9d Figure Figure
B9b B9c to B9i B9k B9l/m User Engineer
Password expires in 30 Days
Apply Discard
Name
Apply Discard
Locale 5) Channel 5
About Desktop 54
(section 4.6.11) Data Entry Background 55
Selection 27
Fixed Text 47
Active Text 6
Disabled Text 49
Title Bar Background 41
Trend Foreground 48
Appears only when
Trend Background 55
viewing via
History Foreground 52
Bridge software
History Background 48
Font set Auto
Default
Apply Discard
If all the entries are correct, the Web Server home page appears, the top part of which is shown in figure
C1, below.
Note: The 'Remote user' must have 'Allow web server' permission enabled (section 4.4.1) and
must have sufficient network access to the product.
12/04/06 14:53:09
As can be seen there are two sets of 'controls' viz the internet links and the instrument access tabs.
C2 INTERNET LINKS
These links (Eurotherm Home Page, Recorder Downloads, Document Library Search) take the user to vari-
ous areas of the manufacturer's web site.
C3 ACCESS TABS
Most of the information displayed in the pages described below is updated every 20 seconds. The ex-
ception is the Trend page refresh rate which can be edited (as shown in figure C3.2) by typing in the new
value, and then either clicking on 'Set' or using the computer <Enter> key. Because of the processing
time required, it is not recommended that a value of less than 5 seconds be entered.
C3.1 INSTRUMENT
This opens the instrument page, a typical example of which is shown in figure C3.1 below.
C3.2 TRENDS
Clicking on the 'Trends' tab displays a screen allowing the user to select a refresh rate and one of Hori-
zontal trend, Vertical Trend or Numeric as the display format. Both the horizontal and vertical trend
modes include the numeric display table.
Home Instrument Trends M
Select
Please selecta trend page viewing
forvi ew ing mode by
Edit refresh rate clicking on required heading
(then click on 'Set')
Span H igh
Earliest sample
Latest sample
Span Low
As shown in the figure, the group process values appear as though being traced on a chart which is roll-
ing from right to left (i.e the oldest sample is at the left edge of the chart, and the latest sample is at the
right edge of the chart). The point Descriptors, Span high and Span low values and process values (at the
time and date at the top left of the screen) appear in a table below the chart.
The amount of time across the width of the chart (the 'horizontal scale') can be edited from its default of
20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page, and confirming either by clicking
on the 'Set' button at bottom right or by using the pc's <Enter> key.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
The required group is selected by clicking on the relevant number at the top of the page. The length of
time that the list covers, can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at
bottom left of the page, and confirming by clicking on the 'Set' button at bottom right or using the <En-
ter> key on the pc. If there are more messages than can be accommodated in the window height, a scroll
bar appear at the left edge of the window to allow hidden messages to be revealed.
C3.4 HISTORY
This produces a list of all the .uhh files held in the instrument archive. The files can be saved to a user-
specified location, for use in Review or Quickchart applications. Figure C3.4 shows part of a typical page.
Note: This data is in archived (TA R)form at,and cannotbe opened directly by Review w ithoutfirsthaving been unzipped.
File Name Size Last Modified
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C4.uhh Click on individual files to save to a 391 Kb 01/05/06 16:20:10
user specified location
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C5.uhh 391 Kb 01/05/06 20:20:10
C3.5 ABOUT
Clicking on this tab displays a subset of the information which appears in the recorder's 'About' screen,
described in section 4.6.11. The items which appear are:
Instrument variant
Serial number
Product software version
Boot ROM version
Board version
SRAM and DRAM capacities.
INDEX
Symbols A (Cont)
1) Channel 1.................................................................221, 372 Alarm
3D effect................................................................................265 Acknowledge
10 to the power..................................................................... 110 Jobs.........................................................................238
{n} source................................................................................. 95 Message enable/disable........................................ 69
?Out of Range....................................................................... 186 Permission...............................................................200
! Symbol................................................................................... 16 Acknowledge (ACK ALL ALARM)................................. 19
? Symbol..................................................................14, 95, 152 Channel indicator........................................................... 18
?Syntax Error......................................................................... 186 Configuration.................................................................. 71
.uhh files................................................................................. 418 Data (Include in copy)...................................................225
.uhq file..................................................................................230 Disable............................................................................238
.uht files.................................................................................. 187 Enable............................................................................... 78
Icons.................................................................................. 15
A Identifier........................................................................... 20
Indication......................................................................... 16
A0 to A5................................................................................. 127 Instrument........................................................................ 16
Abort...................................................................................... 156 Summary................................................................... 19
About............................................................................229, 413 Jobs.................................................................................238
Absolute high/low.................................................................. 78 Marks, colour selection................................................265
A/B switching................................................................... 67, 76 Messages......................................................................... 81
Access Enable/disable......................................................... 69
Configuration.......................................................198, 410 Message log............................................................. 25
Flap.................................................................................... 10 Number............................................................................ 77
Levels.......................................................................15, 198 On Group (Event source)............................................... 91
To configuration.............................................................. 32 Parameters....................................................................... 79
When............................................................................... 199 Setpoint
Ack all alarms.......................................................................... 19 Edit permission......................................................200
ACK Message.......................................................................... 69 Source........................................................................ 78
Acknowledge Sounds............................................................................ 249
Alarms............................................................................... 19 Summary page................................................................ 20
Jobs.........................................................................238 System.............................................................................. 16
Permission...............................................................200 Type................................................................................... 78
AC Supply voltage range............................................... 9, 377 All
Action demand writes.........................................................202 Messages......................................................................... 25
Active Directory Points.............................................................................. 270
Security........................................................................... 215 Allow
Server..................................................................... 199, 215 Constant edits............................................................... 175
Setup....................................................................... 210 Web server.....................................................................202
Active Text colour................................................................227 Always...........................................................................269, 270
Adaptive recording................................................................ 66 Amount Rate-of-change alarms........................................... 79
Add Analogue outputs.......................................................173, 332
Key...................................................................................256 Specification..................................................................384
Maths function............................................................... 109 AND.......................................................................................... 93
Points to groups.............................................................. 70 Apply...................................................................................... 156
User.................................................................................208 Key (Ethernet IP config.)............................................... 185
Configuration menu.............................................. 410 Arc
Address Angle...............................................................................263
Allocation (Modbus).....................................................290 Definition........................................................................ 278
IP...................................................................................... 214 Height.............................................................................263
MAC...................................................................... 213, 388 Width..............................................................................263
Map (Modbus)...............................................................288 Archive
Network.......................................................................... 213 All....................................................................................... 53
Adjust Configuration
Channels................................................................221, 372 Automatic.................................................................. 85
Inputs..............................................................................221 Manual....................................................................... 52
Permission...............................................................200 Menu........................................................................405
Outputs..........................................................................332 Control permission....................................................... 201
Permission...............................................................200 Enable............................................................................... 69
Remove...........................................................................221 File formats...............................................................89, 90
Advanced Indicator........................................................................... 18
Edit level.........................................................................258 Jobs.................................................................................238
Parameters.....................................................................265 Key menu........................................................................402
C (Cont.) C (Cont.)
Centralised Security............................................................206 Close key...............................................................................257
Change Cold junction compensation (CJC)..................................... 76
Alarm setpoints permission........................................200 Remote CJC Block option........................................... 361
Battery Colour
Procedure...............................................................391 Alarms.............................................................................265
Symbol....................................................................... 18 B.......................................................................................236
Maths constant permission.........................................200 Group......................................................................236
Password........................................................................209 Backgrounds..................................................................265
Time and date................................................................ 219 Backgrounds, Text etc..................................................227
Time (Rate-of-change alarms)....................................... 79 Channel...................................................................77, 266
Change Password................................................................ 197 Foregrounds..................................................................266
Changes not recorded........................................................203 RGB definitions..............................................................395
Channel Style................................................................................266
Alarms.............................................................................266 Thresholds.....................................................................266
Indicator.................................................................... 18 Trace.................................................................................. 77
Sounds..................................................................... 249 Colours and Fonts configuration menu............................ 413
Ave/Max/Min..................................................................111 Communications
Bargraph......................................................................... 272 Channel timeout......................................................63, 91
Colour............................................................................... 77 Diagnostics...........................................................171, 223
Configuration.........................................................71, 404 Modbus master............................................................. 171
32-bit data (MODBUS).......................................... 318 Printer settings.............................................................. 347
MODBUS.................................................................291 Serial............................................................................... 149
Copy...................................................................... 224, 225 Compact Flash location........................................................ 11
Cycle time.......................................................................265 Component
Cycling enable/disable.................................................. 36 Definitions...................................................................... 271
Damping........................................................................... 76 Info on screen................................................................258
Data................................................................................. 272 Compressibility factor................................................ 115, 116
Descriptor........................................................................ 76 Compression........................................................................... 86
Error.................................................................................. 16 Config
Failure............................................................................... 16 Key......................................................................... 58 to 242
Maths..............................................................................108 Revision..........................................................................229
Number......................................................... 72, 160, 162 Number....................................................................111
Numeric.......................................................................... 272 Configuration.......................................................................... 51
Run-time data (Modbus)..............................................303 A/B switching........................................................... 67, 76
IEEE (32-bit)................................................. 322 to 374 Access............................................................................. 198
Select.....................................................................221, 372 Alarm................................................................................. 71
Thresholds.....................................................................266 Analogue outputs......................................................... 172
User screen parameter.................................................263 Archive.............................................................................. 85
Value........................................................................72, 270 ASCII printer..................................................................339
Virtual.............................................................................. 195 Audit pack......................................................................203
Character set........................................................................... 33 Batch...............................................................................100
Serial comms.................................................................398 Break response................................................................ 76
Chart Channel............................................................................ 71
Full..................................................................................... 67 Clock............................................................................... 219
Speed......................................................................... 42, 67 Cold junction compensation........................................ 76
Circular Copy................................................................................224
Chart Full.......................................................................... 67 Counter........................................................................... 143
Settings............................................................................. 67 Country........................................................................... 219
Speed................................................................................ 67 Date format.................................................................... 219
Trend Mode..................................................................... 40 Decimal places................................................................ 77
CJC........................................................................................... 76 Demand Writes............................................................. 174
Remote CJC Block Unit................................................ 361 Display brightness settings........................................... 63
Cleaning................................................................................390 DST.................................................................................. 219
Clear..............................................................................196, 236 Email............................................................................... 178
Password Cache................................................... 197, 210 Ethernet Diagnostics....................................................223
Clock Event................................................................................. 91
Accuracy......................................................................... 377 Buttons...................................................................... 94
Failure (instrument alarm).............................................. 16 Filter.................................................................................. 76
Jobs.................................................................................233 Full (access permission)............................................... 201
Preset hours and minutes settings............................... 64 Group................................................................................ 65
Setting............................................................................ 219 Input adjust....................................................................221
Permission...............................................................200 Input low/high................................................................. 73
D (Cont.) D (Cont.)
Demand Disk
Type................................................................................. 175 Size.................................................................................... 87
Writes.............................................................................. 174 Symbol.............................................................................. 18
Action permission.................................................202 Display
Button...................................................................... 175 Alarms............................................................................. 267
Configuration menu..............................................408 Bargraph......................................................................... 267
Copy........................................................................225 Batch Dialogue.............................................................. 107
Jobs......................................................................... 237 Brightness........................................................................ 63
To specific register................................................ 176 Calibration.....................................................................386
With Audit Trail...................................................... 177 Colour configuration menu......................................... 413
Deploy....................................................................................257 Descriptor...................................................................... 267
Descriptor Enable (group)................................................................. 83
Channel............................................................................ 76 Home................................................................................ 82
Demand write................................................................ 175 Messages....................................................................... 267
Email Recipient list........................................................ 179 Modes............................................................................... 35
Event................................................................................. 93 Circular trend........................................................... 40
Event Button.................................................................... 94 Enable........................................................................ 83
Font................................................................................. 267 Home......................................................................... 82
Group.........................................................................15, 66 Horizontal bargraph................................................ 46
Group minimum maths function................................ 132 Horizontal trend....................................................... 38
Instrument........................................................................ 63 Numeric..................................................................... 48
Minimum Channel......................................................... 132 Select......................................................................... 28
Output channel.................................................... 172, 173 Vertical bargraph..................................................... 44
Report....................................................................182, 341 Vertical trend............................................................ 36
Slave device................................................................... 155 Pens................................................................................. 267
Timer............................................................................... 148 Test..................................................................................386
User Linearisation table................................................. 98 Units................................................................................ 267
Detect Update rate.................................................................... 377
All slaves......................................................................... 156 Values (truncation of)..................................................... 14
This slave........................................................................ 155 Dispose..................................................................................257
Deviation Divide..................................................................................... 109
Alarm type....................................................................... 78 DNS........................................................................................ 216
Value................................................................................. 79 Domain name
DHCP Server failure............................................................... 16 Access menu.................................................................. 199
Diagnostics Domain Name Service......................................................... 216
Display............................................................................385 Do Not Remove Archive Media............................................ 13
Ethernet..........................................................................223 Draw
Master comms............................................................... 171 Edge................................................................................263
Summary........................................................................388 Order..............................................................................263
Dialogue action.................................................................... 272 Drive Relay job...................................................................... 231
Digital............................................................................160, 162 Dry bulb temperature.......................................................... 127
Disable Dryness.................................................................................. 120
Alarms.............................................................................238 DST......................................................................................... 219
Counter...........................................................................233 D-type connector wiring......................................................... 9
Display Duration................................................................................. 148
Alarms..................................................................... 267 Dwell........................................................................................ 79
Descriptor............................................................... 267
Messages................................................................ 267 E
Pens.......................................................................... 267
Units......................................................................... 267 Earlier messages.................................................................... 26
Group counters.............................................................233 Edit
Group totalisers............................................................. 231 Level................................................................................258
Login...............................................................................200 Maths constant permission.........................................200
Maths Function..............................................................232 Output channel default................................................ 201
Retries............................................................................. 175 Own password permission..........................................200
Timer job........................................................................234 Parameter.......................................................................263
Totaliser.......................................................................... 231 EIA232 / EIA485 selection.................................................. 151
Warning dialogs.............................................................. 64 Elapsed time format............................................................. 112
Disabled Text colour............................................................227 Electrical installation................................................................ 5
Discard................................................................................... 156 Email
Ethernet IP Table........................................................... 185 Access............................................................................. 181
Key...................................................................................257 Appearance................................................................... 180
I J
Identifier................................................................................264 Jobs........................................................................................ 231
Image..................................................................................... 273 Active while/on................................................................ 81
File...................................................................................264 Alarm...............................................................................238
Implicit I/O messaging.............................................. 184, 224 Archive............................................................................238
Import Batch...............................................................................234
An image........................................................................ 273 Category.......................................................................... 81
Ethernet table................................................................ 185 Clock...............................................................................233
Key...................................................................................257 Counter...........................................................................233
Printer driver...........................................................57, 343 Data
Screen..................................................................... 56, 253 Include in copy.......................................................225
User linearisation............................................................ 57 Demand Writes............................................................. 237
In alarm or error.................................................................... 270 Drive relay...................................................................... 231
Include Email...............................................................................239
Alarm data......................................................................225 Maths..............................................................................232
Job data..........................................................................225 Message.........................................................................232
Message......................................................................... 179 Number..................................................................... 81, 93
Increment counter................................................................233 Output............................................................................ 237
Indirection tables (Modbus)............................................... 315 Recording.......................................................................235
Input Report.............................................................................239
Adjust..............................................................................221 Search....................................................................226, 413
Configuration menu.............................................. 412 Timer...............................................................................234
Board pinout...................................................................... 7 Totaliser.......................................................................... 231
Board specification....................................................... 379 Trend...............................................................................236
Low/high........................................................................... 73 Just value............................................................................... 267
Type................................................................................... 72
Input 1 to 200........................................................................ 185 K
Installation
Category........................................................................ 375 K.............................................................................................. 114
Electrical............................................................................. 5 Key
Mechanical......................................................................... 2 Code...............................................................................220
Large frame unit......................................................... 4 File............................................................................220
Small frame unit......................................................... 3 Functions.......................................................................... 28
Inst cal corr n......................................................................... 134
Inst calibration points.......................................................... 134 L
Inst cal temp n....................................................................... 134 Label symbols........................................................................... 1
Instrument Language............................................................................... 219
Alarms............................................................................... 16 Last
As event sources...................................................... 92 Channel..........................................................................221
Message disable...................................................... 64 Error................................................................................264
Summary................................................................... 19 Updated.........................................................................229
Symbol (Exclamation mark).................................... 16 Last channel.......................................................................... 372
Configuration.................................................................. 63 Latched.................................................................................... 78
Menu........................................................................404 Text.................................................................................... 94
Data (Modbus)...............................................................290 Later messages....................................................................... 26
Name................................................................................. 63 LED INDICATORS................................................................... 11
Number.................................................................213, 220 Left arrow key.......................................................................... 28
Variant.............................................................................229 Line......................................................................................... 277
Insufficient non-volatile memory......................................... 16 Across the chart.............................................................. 36
Internal CJ............................................................................... 76 Feed....................................................182, 183, 341, 342
Internal flash error messages............................................... 16 Thickness........................................................................268
Interval B................................................................................236 Wiring................................................................................. 9
Invalid Linear
Multiple register writes................................................ 281 Chart grid......................................................................... 68
Password entry................................................................ 92 Mass flow........................................................................ 114
Selection.......................................................................... 70 Scales................................................................................ 74
Invalid item (EtherNet IP).................................................... 186 Linearisation
I/O Table................................................................................ 185 Function (LIN Type)......................................................... 72
IP Address....................................................................155, 214 Function (User entered)................................................. 98
Lookup............................................................................ 213 Link error count...........................................................151, 339
Manual entry.................................................................. 214 List of operators................................................................... 270
M (Cont.) M (Cont.)
Maximum Minimum
Block size........................................................................ 155 Channel Descriptor...................................................... 132
Decimal digits.................................................................. 77 Height.............................................................................268
Number of Bridge ........................................................ 251 Password length............................................................204
Number of data bytes..................................................280 PC requirements...........................................................244
Max/Min (adaptive recording).............................................. 66 Width..............................................................................268
Mean kinetic temperature (MKT)....................................... 118 Min-max recording................................................................ 66
Measured Missing pixels test................................................................386
Gas.................................................................................. 126 MKT maths function............................................................. 118
Oxygen........................................................................... 126 Group.............................................................................. 124
Measuring units.................................................................... 279 Modbus
Mechanical installation............................................................ 2 Address.................................................................155, 156
Large frame unit................................................................ 4 Setting....................................................................... 63
Small frame unit................................................................ 3 Address 255................................................................... 152
Media....................................................................................... 86 Batch initiation............................................................... 107
Archiving error messages.............................................. 16 Comms Input................................................................. 109
File format................................................................. 87, 89 Master/Slave configuration menus............................407
Full..................................................................................... 53 Maximum number of data bytes................................280
Event limit................................................................. 87 RTU.................................................................................. 149
Location............................................................................ 11 Security........................................................................... 281
Removal............................................................................ 12 Enable/disable......................................................... 63
Size.................................................................................... 87 Slave
Medium Priority interval...................................................... 154 Enable...................................................................... 155
Memory device location....................................................... 11 Online...................................................................... 155
Memory size............................................................................ 86 Selection................................................................. 154
Menu structure Status..............................................................................223
Archive key.....................................................................402 Wiring.............................................................................280
Config menu..................................................... 404 to 409 Modulus..................................................................................111
Network key menu........................................................ 411 Monthly............................................................................. 87, 88
Root menu......................................................................401 Mouse lock-up...................................................................... 378
Save/Restore key...........................................................403 Move Screen.........................................................................257
Security key.................................................................... 410 Multiply.................................................................................. 109
System key..................................................................... 412
Message.......................................................................182, 341 N
Alarm................................................................................. 81
Auditor, Batch................................................................100 Name files by Batch............................................................. 103
Bar..................................................................................... 42 NAND....................................................................................... 93
Batch, Initiation.............................................................. 103 Navigation
Colour.............................................................................268 Action............................................................................. 272
Configuration........................................................ 95, 405 Keys................................................................................... 28
Copy................................................................................225 Network
Display (batch)............................................................... 106 Address.......................................................................... 213
Enable/disable................................................................. 69 Master comms........................................................ 155
Entry.................................................................................. 95 Boot failure....................................................................... 16
Example.................................................................... 97 Configuration....................................................... 213, 411
Inclusion in reports....................................................... 182 Connection has timed out........................................... 251
Jobs.................................................................................232 Ethernet/Serial selection............................................. 155
Log.................................................................................... 24 Key................................................................................... 411
Number............................................................................ 95 Name............................................................................... 216
Operator entered........................................................... 50 Scanning tool................................................................. 215
Power up........................................................................... 31 Specification.................................................................. 378
Serial comms................................................................. 149 Never...................................................................................... 270
Start/End characters.................................................... 151 New................................................................................ 56, 257
Text.................................................................................... 95 Chart................................................................................. 67
To print............................................................................340 Configuration.................................................................. 56
Messages Domain name................................................................208
Log.................................................................................. 417 File...................................................................................240
Messaging Full user name...............................................................208
Information.................................................................... 152 Key (File).........................................................................240
Rules................................................................................ 152 Password...............................................................199, 208
User ID............................................................................208
User Screen key................................................... 256, 257
N (Cont.) O (Cont.)
No Out of Range......................................................................... 186
Action............................................................................. 231 Output
Alarms............................................................................. 267 Adjust..............................................................................332
Chart grid......................................................................... 68 Channel
Nominal height/width.........................................................268 Configuration
None.......................................................... 68, 74, 87, 88, 177 Analogue outputs...........................................173
NOR.......................................................................................... 93 Master comms.................................................172
Normal Menu.................................................................408
Print style........................................................................ 183 Edit default permission......................................... 201
View (circular charts)....................................................... 41 Number.......................................................... 172, 173
Normal/Saver display............................................................ 63 Range High/Low.................................................... 173
Notes.............................................................................. 50, 268 Copy................................................................................225
Message log option........................................................ 26 Jobs................................................................................. 237
No Text................................................................................... 269 Type........................................................................ 172, 173
Not in alarm or error............................................................ 270 Output 1 to 200.................................................................... 185
Number Oval........................................................................................ 277
Of batch messages....................................................... 102 Overwrite................................................................................. 87
Of columns.....................................................................268 Existing slaves............................................................... 156
Of Fields................................................................182, 341 Ovr............................................................................................ 33
Of points........................................................................... 99 Oxygen
Of rows...........................................................................268 Concentration............................................................... 128
Numeric Correction...................................................................... 126
Display mode................................................................... 48 Potential.......................................................................... 130
Enable........................................................................ 83
Web server.............................................................. 417 P
PV format................................................................. 77, 112
Width..............................................................................268 Page
N Value...................................................................................264 Name................................................................................. 15
Title.................................................................................264
O Up/down keys.................................................................. 28
Paint
O2 All.....................................................................................268
Concentration............................................................... 128 Background....................................................................268
Correction...................................................................... 126 Paper Low/Out instrument alarm........................................ 17
Potential.......................................................................... 130 Paper Low/Paper Out............................................................ 17
Off......................................................................................78, 91 Parameter.................................................. 160, 162, 172, 175
Offset..............................................................................73, 173 Parity...................................................................................... 151
Correction (touch screen)............................................386 Serial comms.................................................................340
OK to remove archive media................................................ 12 Serial printer.................................................................. 347
On Password
Becoming active/inactive etc...................................... 231 Attempts.........................................................................204
Error................................................................................ 173 Authentication............................................................... 210
Write Default................................................. 172, 175 Cache.............................................................................. 210
Job active.................................................................. 81, 93 Expiry....................................................................... 215
Media full.......................................................................... 87 Change...........................................................................209
New clear....................................................................... 102 Change on Expiry.........................................................206
Start/stop log................................................................. 102 Default (=100)........................................................... 31, 32
Visibility change............................................................268 Editing............................................................................ 199
Online (Modbus slave)......................................................... 155 Edit own, permission....................................................200
Open/Closed strings........................................................... 165 Expire..............................................................................204
Operator Expiry time.....................................................................200
Access level...................................................................... 31 Force change.................................................................202
Button............................................................................. 273 Master comms............................................................... 155
Event logic........................................................................ 93 Minimum length............................................................204
Key..................................................................................... 28 New/Retype................................................................... 199
Notes................................................................................. 50 Remote........................................................................... 199
Options...................................................................... 194 to 196 Paste
Board pinout...................................................................... 8 File...................................................................................240
Display............................................................................409 Key...................................................................................256
Key..................................................................................... 28 Paste/Delete files permission............................................. 201
OR............................................................................................. 93 Perform upgrades................................................................ 201
R (Cont.) S
Remaining.............................................................................. 148 Safety notes............................................................................... 1
Remote Sales Demo Enable/Disable...............................................386
Archiving (FTP transfer)................................................. 54 Sample and Hold.................................................................. 110
CJ block option Sample rates......................................................................... 377
Portable case.......................................................... 359 Saturated steam
CJC block option.......................................................... 361 Heat consumed............................................................. 123
Cold junction compensation........................................ 76 Heat flow......................................................................... 122
Modbus Client...............................................................223 Mass flow........................................................................ 120
Password........................................................................ 199 Save................................................................................ 56, 257
Path................................................................................... 88 After.................................................................................. 63
User name...................................................................... 199 As....................................................................................... 56
Removable media Saver Display
Capacity........................................................................... 87 Configuration.................................................................. 63
Error messages (instrument alarms)............................ 17 Job..................................................................................236
Remove Save/Restore
Adjust..............................................................................221 Key..................................................................................... 55
Media................................................................................ 28 Menu........................................................................403
User........................................................................209, 410 Permission...................................................................... 201
Repeat after/in...................................................................... 148 Scale
Replace {n} with...................................................................... 95 Circular chart................................................................... 42
Reports...........................................................................25, 341 Divisions........................................................................... 74
Configuration.......................................................182, 341 Divisions (Major/Minor)................................................268
Menu........................................................................409 Low/high......................................................................... 143
Destination.....................................................................239 Maths functions.......................................................111
Example..........................................................................344 Low/high/units................................................................ 73
Jobs.................................................................................239 Style................................................................................ 269
Number.......................................................................... 182 Type................................................................................... 74
Selection........................................................................239 Scaled...................................................................................... 73
Require Scale Low/High
Authorization..........................................................94, 205 Totaliser.......................................................................... 139
Signing.................................................................... 94, 204 Scaling....................................................... 160, 164, 172, 177
Re-scan.................................................................................. 156 Factor..................................................................... 114, 116
Reset Scientific PV format....................................................... 77, 112
Maths Function..............................................................232 Scope..............................................................................82, 101
Permission...............................................................200 Screen
Now................................................................................. 148 Brightness........................................................................ 63
Timer Builder option.....................252. See also User Screens
Job...........................................................................234 Calibration.....................................................................386
Permission...............................................................200 Import/Export................................................................. 56
Restore..................................................................................... 56 Number..........................................................................264
Retransmission..................................................................... 173 Saver................................................................................. 63
Retry....................................................................................... 155 Size.................................................................................. 279
Time................................................................................ 179 SD card location..................................................................... 11
Retype password.........................................................199, 208 Secondary
Reversed colour....................................................................268 Login/Password/Remote Host...................................... 88
Revert.....................................................................................257 Secondary DNS server........................................................ 216
Revision numbers.................................................................229 Second Start/End character............................................... 151
RFC2822................................................................................ 180 Security
RH........................................................................................... 127 Full, access permission................................................ 201
Right arrow key....................................................................... 28 Key.......................................................................... 197, 410
Rolling average..................................................................... 118 Levels.............................................................................. 198
Root mass flow...................................................................... 116 Modbus.......................................................................... 281
Root menu Revision Number...........................................................230
Keys................................................................................... 28 Maths function........................................................111
Overview........................................................................401 Select
Rotate chart......................................................................40, 67 Channels................................................................221, 372
Round Rectangle.................................................................. 274 Display mode................................................................... 28
RTD input specification.......................................................380 Group................................................................................ 29
Point Type......................................................................... 70
Selected item colour...........................................................227
Self Start................................................................................ 148
S (Cont.) S (Cont.)
Send Span High/Low
On Power Up.................................................................. 175 EtherNet/IP.................................................................... 187
Report to........................................................................239 Spanned.................................................................................. 77
Sender.................................................................................... 179 Special modes......................................................................386
Serial 1/Serial 2.....................................................................389 Specification
Serial communications........................................................ 149 Analogue output board...............................................384
Configuration................................................................407 ASCII Printer..................................................................384
Message information................................................... 152 Back-up battery............................................................ 377
Pinout.................................................................................. 9 Event input board.........................................................384
Port selection................................................................. 151 Input board.................................................................... 379
ASCII printer...........................................................339 Pressure transducer.....................................................354
Specification.................................................................. 378 Previous instruments...................................................382
Standard (EIA232 or EIA485)...................................... 151 Recorder, general......................................................... 376
Service level access............................................................... 31 Relay output board.......................................................383
Set clock permission............................................................200 RTC.................................................................................. 377
Setpoint source...................................................................... 78 Serial comms board..................................................... 378
Setting the time and date................................................... 219 Transmitter Power Supply........................................... 378
Share Socket......................................................................... 155 USB ports....................................................................... 378
Shift.......................................................................................... 33 Specific gas constant................................................. 114, 116
Shortest trend history/duration........................................... 86 Specified descriptor/value/alarm........................................ 96
Show Specified O₂......................................................................... 126
Batch entry list............................................................... 101 Speed/Interval B........................................................ 235, 236
Disk (local) settings......................................................... 86 Speed of recording............................................................... 69
Operator notes list.......................................................... 64 Square Root.......................................................................... 110
Title Bar...........................................................................264 'S' symbol..............................................................................386
Show Errors key.................................................................... 185 Start
Shunt........................................................................................ 73 and End characters...................................................... 151
Signal wiring.............................................................................. 5 and stop batches.......................................................... 101
Remote CJC block Angle..............................................................................264
Large frame...................................................361, 364 as Lite..............................................................................248
Small frame.............................................................368 At....................................................................................... 67
Signings................................................................................... 25 New Table...................................................................... 187
Simulation option................................................................. 196 Now................................................................................. 148
Single line Faceplate............................................................ 267 Slave detection............................................................. 156
Slave..................................................154, 160, 162, 172, 175 Timer
Slave detection..................................................................... 156 Job...........................................................................234
SMPT...................................................................................... 179 Permission..............................................................200
SMS......................................................................................... 179 Start of message characters.............................................. 151
SNTP Status
Client enable................................................................. 214 Bar..................................................................................... 15
Server.............................................................................. 214 Demand write................................................................ 175
Enable...................................................................... 214 Ethernet IP..................................................................... 185
Server failure instrument alarm.................................... 17 Stop
Socket, share......................................................................... 158 Bits.........................................................................151, 340
Software version...................................................................229 On media full................................................................... 87
Sort........................................................................................... 23 Stopwatch............................................................................. 109
Source Store Diagnostics................................................................. 154
Demand write................................................................ 175 Style............................................................................. 183, 342
Descriptor/value/alarm data......................................... 95 Stylus location........................................................................ 11
Files From.......................................................................220 Subject................................................................................... 179
Output channel............................................................. 172 Subnet mask......................................................................... 214
Span high/low............................................................... 173 Subtract................................................................................. 109
Type Summary
Copy........................................................................225 Menu................................................................................. 19
Event.......................................................................... 91 Page
Source 1 sense........................................................................ 92 Alarm......................................................................... 20
Source 2 sense........................................................................ 93 Batch......................................................................... 22
Spam...................................................................................... 180 Summertime configuration................................................ 219
Span..............................................................................160, 162 Supply voltage
Span B Ranges....................................................................... 9, 377
Configuration.................................................................. 77 Wiring................................................................................. 9
Jobs.................................................................................236
W (Cont.) X
Wiring X1.............................................................................................. 98
Analogue outputs............................................................. 8 Xon/Xoff................................................................................ 347
ASCII printer..................................................................338 XOR.......................................................................................... 93
D-type connector.............................................................. 9 X points/position..................................................................264
Event inputs....................................................................... 8
Input board........................................................................ 7 Y
Modbus..........................................................................280
Option boards................................................................... 8 Y1.............................................................................................. 98
Relay.................................................................................... 8 You are already running ... message........................243, 251
Remote CJC block You are authenticating Full Bridge... message................ 251
Large frame...................................................361, 364 Y points/position..................................................................264
Small frame.............................................................368
Serial comms............................................................ 9, 149 Z
Signal.................................................................................. 5
Supply (Mains)................................................................... 9 Z-Factor.................................................................................. 115
Transmitter Power Supply............................................337 Zirconia probe...................................................................... 128
Wire size Zone
Signal........................................................................... 5 B, select job...................................................................236
Supply.......................................................................... 9 Chart area......................................................................... 77
with unapplied changes......................................................204 Time
Wizard (Ethernet IP) Details......................................................................399
Ethernet IP...................................................................... 185 Selection................................................................. 219
Worst case error calculation...............................................381 Z value.................................................................................... 113
Write
Enable............................................................................. 175
Number.......................................................................... 175
to a specific register..................................................... 176
SWEDEN Malmo
INDIA Mumbai Eurotherm AB
AUSTRIA Vienna Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Eurotherm GmbH Invensys India Pvt. Ltd.
Fax (+46 40) 384545
Telephone (+91 22) 6757 9800
Telephone (+43 1) 798 7601 E-mail [email protected]
Fax (+91 22) 6757 9999
Fax (+43 1) 798 7605
E-mail [email protected]
E-mail [email protected] SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
IRELAND Dublin Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm Ireland Limited E-mail [email protected]
Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+353 1) 469 1300 UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail [email protected] Eurotherm Limited
E-mail [email protected] Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
ITALY Como E-mail [email protected]
BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm S.r.l Web www.invensys.co.uk
Eurotherm Ltda. Telephone (+39 031) 975111
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+39 031) 977512 U.S.A Ashburn VA
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 E-mail [email protected] Eurotherm Inc.
E-mail [email protected] Telephone (+1 703) 724 7300
Fax (+1 703) 724 7301
KOREA Seoul E-mail [email protected]
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA POLAND Katowice
Telephone (+33 478) 66 45 00 Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Fax (+33 478) 35 24 90 Telephone (+48 32) 7839500
E-mail [email protected] Fax (+48 32) 7843608/7843609
E-mail [email protected]
HA028910/9 (CN27313)